]> git.ipfire.org Git - thirdparty/gcc.git/blame - gcc/tm.texi
sparc.md (movdf): Only generate special RTL for LABEL_REFs when PIC.
[thirdparty/gcc.git] / gcc / tm.texi
CommitLineData
e5e809f4 1@c Copyright (C) 1988,89,92,93,94,96,97,1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
feca2ed3
JW
2@c This is part of the GCC manual.
3@c For copying conditions, see the file gcc.texi.
4
5@node Target Macros
6@chapter Target Description Macros
7@cindex machine description macros
8@cindex target description macros
9@cindex macros, target description
10@cindex @file{tm.h} macros
11
12In addition to the file @file{@var{machine}.md}, a machine description
13includes a C header file conventionally given the name
14@file{@var{machine}.h}. This header file defines numerous macros
15that convey the information about the target machine that does not fit
16into the scheme of the @file{.md} file. The file @file{tm.h} should be
17a link to @file{@var{machine}.h}. The header file @file{config.h}
18includes @file{tm.h} and most compiler source files include
19@file{config.h}.
20
21@menu
22* Driver:: Controlling how the driver runs the compilation passes.
23* Run-time Target:: Defining @samp{-m} options like @samp{-m68000} and @samp{-m68020}.
24* Storage Layout:: Defining sizes and alignments of data.
25* Type Layout:: Defining sizes and properties of basic user data types.
26* Registers:: Naming and describing the hardware registers.
27* Register Classes:: Defining the classes of hardware registers.
28* Stack and Calling:: Defining which way the stack grows and by how much.
29* Varargs:: Defining the varargs macros.
30* Trampolines:: Code set up at run time to enter a nested function.
31* Library Calls:: Controlling how library routines are implicitly called.
32* Addressing Modes:: Defining addressing modes valid for memory operands.
33* Condition Code:: Defining how insns update the condition code.
34* Costs:: Defining relative costs of different operations.
35* Sections:: Dividing storage into text, data, and other sections.
36* PIC:: Macros for position independent code.
37* Assembler Format:: Defining how to write insns and pseudo-ops to output.
38* Debugging Info:: Defining the format of debugging output.
39* Cross-compilation:: Handling floating point for cross-compilers.
40* Misc:: Everything else.
41@end menu
42
43@node Driver
44@section Controlling the Compilation Driver, @file{gcc}
45@cindex driver
46@cindex controlling the compilation driver
47
48@c prevent bad page break with this line
49You can control the compilation driver.
50
51@table @code
52@findex SWITCH_TAKES_ARG
53@item SWITCH_TAKES_ARG (@var{char})
54A C expression which determines whether the option @samp{-@var{char}}
55takes arguments. The value should be the number of arguments that
56option takes--zero, for many options.
57
58By default, this macro is defined as
59@code{DEFAULT_SWITCH_TAKES_ARG}, which handles the standard options
60properly. You need not define @code{SWITCH_TAKES_ARG} unless you
61wish to add additional options which take arguments. Any redefinition
62should call @code{DEFAULT_SWITCH_TAKES_ARG} and then check for
63additional options.
64
65@findex WORD_SWITCH_TAKES_ARG
66@item WORD_SWITCH_TAKES_ARG (@var{name})
67A C expression which determines whether the option @samp{-@var{name}}
68takes arguments. The value should be the number of arguments that
69option takes--zero, for many options. This macro rather than
70@code{SWITCH_TAKES_ARG} is used for multi-character option names.
71
72By default, this macro is defined as
73@code{DEFAULT_WORD_SWITCH_TAKES_ARG}, which handles the standard options
74properly. You need not define @code{WORD_SWITCH_TAKES_ARG} unless you
75wish to add additional options which take arguments. Any redefinition
76should call @code{DEFAULT_WORD_SWITCH_TAKES_ARG} and then check for
77additional options.
78
88117d44
NC
79@findex SWITCH_CURTAILS_COMPILATION
80@item SWITCH_CURTAILS_COMPILATION (@var{char})
81A C expression which determines whether the option @samp{-@var{char}}
82stops compilation before the generation of an executable. The value is
83boolean, non-zero if the option does stop an executable from being
84generated, zero otherwise.
85
86By default, this macro is defined as
87@code{DEFAULT_SWITCH_CURTAILS_COMPILATION}, which handles the standard
88options properly. You need not define
89@code{SWITCH_CURTAILS_COMPILATION} unless you wish to add additional
90options which affect the generation of an executable. Any redefinition
91should call @code{DEFAULT_SWITCH_CURTAILS_COMPILATION} and then check
92for additional options.
93
feca2ed3
JW
94@findex SWITCHES_NEED_SPACES
95@item SWITCHES_NEED_SPACES
96A string-valued C expression which enumerates the options for which
97the linker needs a space between the option and its argument.
98
99If this macro is not defined, the default value is @code{""}.
100
101@findex CPP_SPEC
102@item CPP_SPEC
103A C string constant that tells the GNU CC driver program options to
104pass to CPP. It can also specify how to translate options you
105give to GNU CC into options for GNU CC to pass to the CPP.
106
107Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
108
109@findex NO_BUILTIN_SIZE_TYPE
110@item NO_BUILTIN_SIZE_TYPE
111If this macro is defined, the preprocessor will not define the builtin macro
112@code{__SIZE_TYPE__}. The macro @code{__SIZE_TYPE__} must then be defined
113by @code{CPP_SPEC} instead.
114
115This should be defined if @code{SIZE_TYPE} depends on target dependent flags
116which are not accessible to the preprocessor. Otherwise, it should not
117be defined.
118
119@findex NO_BUILTIN_PTRDIFF_TYPE
120@item NO_BUILTIN_PTRDIFF_TYPE
121If this macro is defined, the preprocessor will not define the builtin macro
122@code{__PTRDIFF_TYPE__}. The macro @code{__PTRDIFF_TYPE__} must then be
123defined by @code{CPP_SPEC} instead.
124
125This should be defined if @code{PTRDIFF_TYPE} depends on target dependent flags
126which are not accessible to the preprocessor. Otherwise, it should not
127be defined.
128
129@findex SIGNED_CHAR_SPEC
130@item SIGNED_CHAR_SPEC
131A C string constant that tells the GNU CC driver program options to
132pass to CPP. By default, this macro is defined to pass the option
133@samp{-D__CHAR_UNSIGNED__} to CPP if @code{char} will be treated as
134@code{unsigned char} by @code{cc1}.
135
136Do not define this macro unless you need to override the default
137definition.
138
139@findex CC1_SPEC
140@item CC1_SPEC
141A C string constant that tells the GNU CC driver program options to
142pass to @code{cc1}. It can also specify how to translate options you
143give to GNU CC into options for GNU CC to pass to the @code{cc1}.
144
145Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
146
147@findex CC1PLUS_SPEC
148@item CC1PLUS_SPEC
149A C string constant that tells the GNU CC driver program options to
150pass to @code{cc1plus}. It can also specify how to translate options you
151give to GNU CC into options for GNU CC to pass to the @code{cc1plus}.
152
153Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
154
155@findex ASM_SPEC
156@item ASM_SPEC
157A C string constant that tells the GNU CC driver program options to
158pass to the assembler. It can also specify how to translate options
159you give to GNU CC into options for GNU CC to pass to the assembler.
160See the file @file{sun3.h} for an example of this.
161
162Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
163
164@findex ASM_FINAL_SPEC
165@item ASM_FINAL_SPEC
166A C string constant that tells the GNU CC driver program how to
167run any programs which cleanup after the normal assembler.
168Normally, this is not needed. See the file @file{mips.h} for
169an example of this.
170
171Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
172
173@findex LINK_SPEC
174@item LINK_SPEC
175A C string constant that tells the GNU CC driver program options to
176pass to the linker. It can also specify how to translate options you
177give to GNU CC into options for GNU CC to pass to the linker.
178
179Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
180
181@findex LIB_SPEC
182@item LIB_SPEC
183Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}. The difference
184between the two is that @code{LIB_SPEC} is used at the end of the
185command given to the linker.
186
187If this macro is not defined, a default is provided that
188loads the standard C library from the usual place. See @file{gcc.c}.
189
190@findex LIBGCC_SPEC
191@item LIBGCC_SPEC
192Another C string constant that tells the GNU CC driver program
193how and when to place a reference to @file{libgcc.a} into the
194linker command line. This constant is placed both before and after
195the value of @code{LIB_SPEC}.
196
197If this macro is not defined, the GNU CC driver provides a default that
198passes the string @samp{-lgcc} to the linker unless the @samp{-shared}
199option is specified.
200
201@findex STARTFILE_SPEC
202@item STARTFILE_SPEC
203Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}. The
204difference between the two is that @code{STARTFILE_SPEC} is used at
205the very beginning of the command given to the linker.
206
207If this macro is not defined, a default is provided that loads the
208standard C startup file from the usual place. See @file{gcc.c}.
209
210@findex ENDFILE_SPEC
211@item ENDFILE_SPEC
212Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}. The
213difference between the two is that @code{ENDFILE_SPEC} is used at
214the very end of the command given to the linker.
215
216Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
217
218@findex EXTRA_SPECS
219@item EXTRA_SPECS
220Define this macro to provide additional specifications to put in the
221@file{specs} file that can be used in various specifications like
222@code{CC1_SPEC}.
223
224The definition should be an initializer for an array of structures,
225containing a string constant, that defines the specification name, and a
226string constant that provides the specification.
227
228Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
229
230@code{EXTRA_SPECS} is useful when an architecture contains several
231related targets, which have various @code{..._SPECS} which are similar
232to each other, and the maintainer would like one central place to keep
233these definitions.
234
235For example, the PowerPC System V.4 targets use @code{EXTRA_SPECS} to
236define either @code{_CALL_SYSV} when the System V calling sequence is
237used or @code{_CALL_AIX} when the older AIX-based calling sequence is
238used.
239
240The @file{config/rs6000/rs6000.h} target file defines:
241
242@example
243#define EXTRA_SPECS \
244 @{ "cpp_sysv_default", CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT @},
245
246#define CPP_SYS_DEFAULT ""
247@end example
248
249The @file{config/rs6000/sysv.h} target file defines:
250@smallexample
251#undef CPP_SPEC
252#define CPP_SPEC \
253"%@{posix: -D_POSIX_SOURCE @} \
254%@{mcall-sysv: -D_CALL_SYSV @} %@{mcall-aix: -D_CALL_AIX @} \
255%@{!mcall-sysv: %@{!mcall-aix: %(cpp_sysv_default) @}@} \
256%@{msoft-float: -D_SOFT_FLOAT@} %@{mcpu=403: -D_SOFT_FLOAT@}"
257
258#undef CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT
259#define CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT "-D_CALL_SYSV"
260@end smallexample
261
262while the @file{config/rs6000/eabiaix.h} target file defines
263@code{CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT} as:
264
265@smallexample
266#undef CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT
267#define CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT "-D_CALL_AIX"
268@end smallexample
269
270@findex LINK_LIBGCC_SPECIAL
271@item LINK_LIBGCC_SPECIAL
272Define this macro if the driver program should find the library
273@file{libgcc.a} itself and should not pass @samp{-L} options to the
274linker. If you do not define this macro, the driver program will pass
275the argument @samp{-lgcc} to tell the linker to do the search and will
276pass @samp{-L} options to it.
277
278@findex LINK_LIBGCC_SPECIAL_1
279@item LINK_LIBGCC_SPECIAL_1
280Define this macro if the driver program should find the library
281@file{libgcc.a}. If you do not define this macro, the driver program will pass
282the argument @samp{-lgcc} to tell the linker to do the search.
283This macro is similar to @code{LINK_LIBGCC_SPECIAL}, except that it does
284not affect @samp{-L} options.
285
9ec36da5
JL
286@findex LINK_COMMAND_SPEC
287@item LINK_COMMAND_SPEC
288A C string constant giving the complete command line need to execute the
289linker. When you do this, you will need to update your port each time a
290change is made to the link command line within @file{gcc.c}. Therefore,
291define this macro only if you need to completely redefine the command
292line for invoking the linker and there is no other way to accomplish
293the effect you need.
294
feca2ed3
JW
295@findex MULTILIB_DEFAULTS
296@item MULTILIB_DEFAULTS
297Define this macro as a C expression for the initializer of an array of
298string to tell the driver program which options are defaults for this
299target and thus do not need to be handled specially when using
300@code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS}.
301
302Do not define this macro if @code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS} is not defined in
303the target makefile fragment or if none of the options listed in
304@code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS} are set by default.
305@xref{Target Fragment}.
306
307@findex RELATIVE_PREFIX_NOT_LINKDIR
308@item RELATIVE_PREFIX_NOT_LINKDIR
309Define this macro to tell @code{gcc} that it should only translate
310a @samp{-B} prefix into a @samp{-L} linker option if the prefix
311indicates an absolute file name.
312
313@findex STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX
314@item STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX
315Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
316standard choice of @file{/usr/local/lib/gcc-lib/} as the default prefix to
317try when searching for the executable files of the compiler.
318
319@findex MD_EXEC_PREFIX
320@item MD_EXEC_PREFIX
321If defined, this macro is an additional prefix to try after
322@code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}. @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX} is not searched
323when the @samp{-b} option is used, or the compiler is built as a cross
324compiler.
325
326@findex STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX
327@item STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX
328Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
329standard choice of @file{/usr/local/lib/} as the default prefix to
330try when searching for startup files such as @file{crt0.o}.
331
332@findex MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX
333@item MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX
334If defined, this macro supplies an additional prefix to try after the
335standard prefixes. @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX} is not searched when the
336@samp{-b} option is used, or when the compiler is built as a cross
337compiler.
338
339@findex MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1
340@item MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1
341If defined, this macro supplies yet another prefix to try after the
342standard prefixes. It is not searched when the @samp{-b} option is
343used, or when the compiler is built as a cross compiler.
344
345@findex INIT_ENVIRONMENT
346@item INIT_ENVIRONMENT
e9a25f70 347Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to set environment
feca2ed3
JW
348variables for programs called by the driver, such as the assembler and
349loader. The driver passes the value of this macro to @code{putenv} to
350initialize the necessary environment variables.
351
352@findex LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR
353@item LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR
354Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
355standard choice of @file{/usr/local/include} as the default prefix to
356try when searching for local header files. @code{LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR}
357comes before @code{SYSTEM_INCLUDE_DIR} in the search order.
358
359Cross compilers do not use this macro and do not search either
360@file{/usr/local/include} or its replacement.
361
362@findex SYSTEM_INCLUDE_DIR
363@item SYSTEM_INCLUDE_DIR
364Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to specify a
365system-specific directory to search for header files before the standard
366directory. @code{SYSTEM_INCLUDE_DIR} comes before
367@code{STANDARD_INCLUDE_DIR} in the search order.
368
369Cross compilers do not use this macro and do not search the directory
370specified.
371
372@findex STANDARD_INCLUDE_DIR
373@item STANDARD_INCLUDE_DIR
374Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
375standard choice of @file{/usr/include} as the default prefix to
376try when searching for header files.
377
378Cross compilers do not use this macro and do not search either
379@file{/usr/include} or its replacement.
380
e9a25f70
JL
381@findex STANDARD_INCLUDE_COMPONENT
382@item STANDARD_INCLUDE_COMPONENT
383The ``component'' corresponding to @code{STANDARD_INCLUDE_DIR}.
384See @code{INCLUDE_DEFAULTS}, below, for the description of components.
385If you do not define this macro, no component is used.
386
feca2ed3
JW
387@findex INCLUDE_DEFAULTS
388@item INCLUDE_DEFAULTS
389Define this macro if you wish to override the entire default search path
e9a25f70
JL
390for include files. For a native compiler, the default search path
391usually consists of @code{GCC_INCLUDE_DIR}, @code{LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR},
feca2ed3
JW
392@code{SYSTEM_INCLUDE_DIR}, @code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR}, and
393@code{STANDARD_INCLUDE_DIR}. In addition, @code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR}
394and @code{GCC_INCLUDE_DIR} are defined automatically by @file{Makefile},
395and specify private search areas for GCC. The directory
396@code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR} is used only for C++ programs.
397
398The definition should be an initializer for an array of structures.
e9a25f70
JL
399Each array element should have four elements: the directory name (a
400string constant), the component name, and flag for C++-only directories,
401and a flag showing that the includes in the directory don't need to be
402wrapped in @code{extern @samp{C}} when compiling C++. Mark the end of
403the array with a null element.
404
405The component name denotes what GNU package the include file is part of,
406if any, in all upper-case letters. For example, it might be @samp{GCC}
407or @samp{BINUTILS}. If the package is part of the a vendor-supplied
408operating system, code the component name as @samp{0}.
409
410
411For example, here is the definition used for VAX/VMS:
feca2ed3
JW
412
413@example
414#define INCLUDE_DEFAULTS \
415@{ \
e9a25f70
JL
416 @{ "GNU_GXX_INCLUDE:", "G++", 1, 1@}, \
417 @{ "GNU_CC_INCLUDE:", "GCC", 0, 0@}, \
418 @{ "SYS$SYSROOT:[SYSLIB.]", 0, 0, 0@}, \
419 @{ ".", 0, 0, 0@}, \
420 @{ 0, 0, 0, 0@} \
feca2ed3
JW
421@}
422@end example
423@end table
424
425Here is the order of prefixes tried for exec files:
426
427@enumerate
428@item
429Any prefixes specified by the user with @samp{-B}.
430
431@item
432The environment variable @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX}, if any.
433
434@item
435The directories specified by the environment variable @code{COMPILER_PATH}.
436
437@item
438The macro @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}.
439
440@item
441@file{/usr/lib/gcc/}.
442
443@item
444The macro @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX}, if any.
445@end enumerate
446
447Here is the order of prefixes tried for startfiles:
448
449@enumerate
450@item
451Any prefixes specified by the user with @samp{-B}.
452
453@item
454The environment variable @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX}, if any.
455
456@item
457The directories specified by the environment variable @code{LIBRARY_PATH}
458(native only, cross compilers do not use this).
459
460@item
461The macro @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}.
462
463@item
464@file{/usr/lib/gcc/}.
465
466@item
467The macro @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX}, if any.
468
469@item
470The macro @code{MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX}, if any.
471
472@item
473The macro @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX}.
474
475@item
476@file{/lib/}.
477
478@item
479@file{/usr/lib/}.
480@end enumerate
481
482@node Run-time Target
483@section Run-time Target Specification
484@cindex run-time target specification
485@cindex predefined macros
486@cindex target specifications
487
488@c prevent bad page break with this line
489Here are run-time target specifications.
490
491@table @code
492@findex CPP_PREDEFINES
493@item CPP_PREDEFINES
494Define this to be a string constant containing @samp{-D} options to
495define the predefined macros that identify this machine and system.
496These macros will be predefined unless the @samp{-ansi} option is
497specified.
498
499In addition, a parallel set of macros are predefined, whose names are
500made by appending @samp{__} at the beginning and at the end. These
501@samp{__} macros are permitted by the ANSI standard, so they are
502predefined regardless of whether @samp{-ansi} is specified.
503
504For example, on the Sun, one can use the following value:
505
506@smallexample
507"-Dmc68000 -Dsun -Dunix"
508@end smallexample
509
510The result is to define the macros @code{__mc68000__}, @code{__sun__}
511and @code{__unix__} unconditionally, and the macros @code{mc68000},
512@code{sun} and @code{unix} provided @samp{-ansi} is not specified.
513
514@findex extern int target_flags
515@item extern int target_flags;
516This declaration should be present.
517
518@cindex optional hardware or system features
519@cindex features, optional, in system conventions
520@item TARGET_@dots{}
521This series of macros is to allow compiler command arguments to
522enable or disable the use of optional features of the target machine.
523For example, one machine description serves both the 68000 and
524the 68020; a command argument tells the compiler whether it should
525use 68020-only instructions or not. This command argument works
526by means of a macro @code{TARGET_68020} that tests a bit in
527@code{target_flags}.
528
529Define a macro @code{TARGET_@var{featurename}} for each such option.
530Its definition should test a bit in @code{target_flags}; for example:
531
532@smallexample
533#define TARGET_68020 (target_flags & 1)
534@end smallexample
535
536One place where these macros are used is in the condition-expressions
537of instruction patterns. Note how @code{TARGET_68020} appears
538frequently in the 68000 machine description file, @file{m68k.md}.
539Another place they are used is in the definitions of the other
540macros in the @file{@var{machine}.h} file.
541
542@findex TARGET_SWITCHES
543@item TARGET_SWITCHES
544This macro defines names of command options to set and clear
545bits in @code{target_flags}. Its definition is an initializer
546with a subgrouping for each command option.
547
548Each subgrouping contains a string constant, that defines the option
b8468bc7
NC
549name, a number, which contains the bits to set in
550@code{target_flags}, and a second string which is the description
551displayed by --help. If the number is negative then the bits specified
552by the number are cleared instead of being set. If the description
553string is present but empty, then no help information will be displayed
554for that option, but it will not count as an undocumented option. The
555actual option name is made by appending @samp{-m} to the specified name.
feca2ed3
JW
556
557One of the subgroupings should have a null string. The number in
558this grouping is the default value for @code{target_flags}. Any
559target options act starting with that value.
560
561Here is an example which defines @samp{-m68000} and @samp{-m68020}
562with opposite meanings, and picks the latter as the default:
563
564@smallexample
565#define TARGET_SWITCHES \
b8468bc7
NC
566 @{ @{ "68020", 1, "" @}, \
567 @{ "68000", -1, "Compile for the 68000" @}, \
568 @{ "", 1, "" @}@}
feca2ed3
JW
569@end smallexample
570
571@findex TARGET_OPTIONS
572@item TARGET_OPTIONS
573This macro is similar to @code{TARGET_SWITCHES} but defines names of command
574options that have values. Its definition is an initializer with a
575subgrouping for each command option.
576
577Each subgrouping contains a string constant, that defines the fixed part
b8468bc7
NC
578of the option name, the address of a variable, and a description string.
579The variable, type @code{char *}, is set to the variable part of the
580given option if the fixed part matches. The actual option name is made
581by appending @samp{-m} to the specified name.
feca2ed3
JW
582
583Here is an example which defines @samp{-mshort-data-@var{number}}. If the
584given option is @samp{-mshort-data-512}, the variable @code{m88k_short_data}
585will be set to the string @code{"512"}.
586
587@smallexample
588extern char *m88k_short_data;
589#define TARGET_OPTIONS \
b8468bc7 590 @{ @{ "short-data-", &m88k_short_data, "Specify the size of the short data section" @} @}
feca2ed3
JW
591@end smallexample
592
593@findex TARGET_VERSION
594@item TARGET_VERSION
595This macro is a C statement to print on @code{stderr} a string
596describing the particular machine description choice. Every machine
597description should define @code{TARGET_VERSION}. For example:
598
599@smallexample
600#ifdef MOTOROLA
601#define TARGET_VERSION \
602 fprintf (stderr, " (68k, Motorola syntax)");
603#else
604#define TARGET_VERSION \
605 fprintf (stderr, " (68k, MIT syntax)");
606#endif
607@end smallexample
608
609@findex OVERRIDE_OPTIONS
610@item OVERRIDE_OPTIONS
611Sometimes certain combinations of command options do not make sense on
612a particular target machine. You can define a macro
613@code{OVERRIDE_OPTIONS} to take account of this. This macro, if
614defined, is executed once just after all the command options have been
615parsed.
616
617Don't use this macro to turn on various extra optimizations for
618@samp{-O}. That is what @code{OPTIMIZATION_OPTIONS} is for.
619
620@findex OPTIMIZATION_OPTIONS
c6aded7c 621@item OPTIMIZATION_OPTIONS (@var{level}, @var{size})
feca2ed3
JW
622Some machines may desire to change what optimizations are performed for
623various optimization levels. This macro, if defined, is executed once
624just after the optimization level is determined and before the remainder
625of the command options have been parsed. Values set in this macro are
626used as the default values for the other command line options.
627
628@var{level} is the optimization level specified; 2 if @samp{-O2} is
629specified, 1 if @samp{-O} is specified, and 0 if neither is specified.
630
c6aded7c
AG
631@var{size} is non-zero if @samp{-Os} is specified and zero otherwise.
632
feca2ed3
JW
633You should not use this macro to change options that are not
634machine-specific. These should uniformly selected by the same
635optimization level on all supported machines. Use this macro to enable
636machine-specific optimizations.
637
638@strong{Do not examine @code{write_symbols} in
639this macro!} The debugging options are not supposed to alter the
640generated code.
641
642@findex CAN_DEBUG_WITHOUT_FP
643@item CAN_DEBUG_WITHOUT_FP
644Define this macro if debugging can be performed even without a frame
645pointer. If this macro is defined, GNU CC will turn on the
646@samp{-fomit-frame-pointer} option whenever @samp{-O} is specified.
647@end table
648
649@node Storage Layout
650@section Storage Layout
651@cindex storage layout
652
653Note that the definitions of the macros in this table which are sizes or
654alignments measured in bits do not need to be constant. They can be C
655expressions that refer to static variables, such as the @code{target_flags}.
656@xref{Run-time Target}.
657
658@table @code
659@findex BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
660@item BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
661Define this macro to have the value 1 if the most significant bit in a
662byte has the lowest number; otherwise define it to have the value zero.
663This means that bit-field instructions count from the most significant
664bit. If the machine has no bit-field instructions, then this must still
665be defined, but it doesn't matter which value it is defined to. This
666macro need not be a constant.
667
668This macro does not affect the way structure fields are packed into
669bytes or words; that is controlled by @code{BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN}.
670
671@findex BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
672@item BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
673Define this macro to have the value 1 if the most significant byte in a
674word has the lowest number. This macro need not be a constant.
675
676@findex WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
677@item WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
678Define this macro to have the value 1 if, in a multiword object, the
679most significant word has the lowest number. This applies to both
680memory locations and registers; GNU CC fundamentally assumes that the
681order of words in memory is the same as the order in registers. This
682macro need not be a constant.
683
684@findex LIBGCC2_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
685@item LIBGCC2_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
686Define this macro if WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN is not constant. This must be a
687constant value with the same meaning as WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN, which will be
688used only when compiling libgcc2.c. Typically the value will be set
689based on preprocessor defines.
690
691@findex FLOAT_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
692@item FLOAT_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
693Define this macro to have the value 1 if @code{DFmode}, @code{XFmode} or
694@code{TFmode} floating point numbers are stored in memory with the word
695containing the sign bit at the lowest address; otherwise define it to
696have the value 0. This macro need not be a constant.
697
698You need not define this macro if the ordering is the same as for
699multi-word integers.
700
701@findex BITS_PER_UNIT
702@item BITS_PER_UNIT
703Define this macro to be the number of bits in an addressable storage
704unit (byte); normally 8.
705
706@findex BITS_PER_WORD
707@item BITS_PER_WORD
708Number of bits in a word; normally 32.
709
710@findex MAX_BITS_PER_WORD
711@item MAX_BITS_PER_WORD
712Maximum number of bits in a word. If this is undefined, the default is
713@code{BITS_PER_WORD}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
714largest value that @code{BITS_PER_WORD} can have at run-time.
715
716@findex UNITS_PER_WORD
717@item UNITS_PER_WORD
718Number of storage units in a word; normally 4.
719
720@findex MIN_UNITS_PER_WORD
721@item MIN_UNITS_PER_WORD
722Minimum number of units in a word. If this is undefined, the default is
723@code{UNITS_PER_WORD}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
724smallest value that @code{UNITS_PER_WORD} can have at run-time.
725
726@findex POINTER_SIZE
727@item POINTER_SIZE
728Width of a pointer, in bits. You must specify a value no wider than the
729width of @code{Pmode}. If it is not equal to the width of @code{Pmode},
730you must define @code{POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED}.
731
732@findex POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED
733@item POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED
734A C expression whose value is nonzero if pointers that need to be
f5963e61
JL
735extended from being @code{POINTER_SIZE} bits wide to @code{Pmode} are to
736be zero-extended and zero if they are to be sign-extended.
feca2ed3
JW
737
738You need not define this macro if the @code{POINTER_SIZE} is equal
739to the width of @code{Pmode}.
740
741@findex PROMOTE_MODE
742@item PROMOTE_MODE (@var{m}, @var{unsignedp}, @var{type})
743A macro to update @var{m} and @var{unsignedp} when an object whose type
744is @var{type} and which has the specified mode and signedness is to be
745stored in a register. This macro is only called when @var{type} is a
746scalar type.
747
748On most RISC machines, which only have operations that operate on a full
749register, define this macro to set @var{m} to @code{word_mode} if
750@var{m} is an integer mode narrower than @code{BITS_PER_WORD}. In most
751cases, only integer modes should be widened because wider-precision
752floating-point operations are usually more expensive than their narrower
753counterparts.
754
755For most machines, the macro definition does not change @var{unsignedp}.
756However, some machines, have instructions that preferentially handle
757either signed or unsigned quantities of certain modes. For example, on
758the DEC Alpha, 32-bit loads from memory and 32-bit add instructions
759sign-extend the result to 64 bits. On such machines, set
760@var{unsignedp} according to which kind of extension is more efficient.
761
762Do not define this macro if it would never modify @var{m}.
763
764@findex PROMOTE_FUNCTION_ARGS
765@item PROMOTE_FUNCTION_ARGS
766Define this macro if the promotion described by @code{PROMOTE_MODE}
767should also be done for outgoing function arguments.
768
769@findex PROMOTE_FUNCTION_RETURN
770@item PROMOTE_FUNCTION_RETURN
771Define this macro if the promotion described by @code{PROMOTE_MODE}
772should also be done for the return value of functions.
773
774If this macro is defined, @code{FUNCTION_VALUE} must perform the same
775promotions done by @code{PROMOTE_MODE}.
776
777@findex PROMOTE_FOR_CALL_ONLY
778@item PROMOTE_FOR_CALL_ONLY
779Define this macro if the promotion described by @code{PROMOTE_MODE}
780should @emph{only} be performed for outgoing function arguments or
781function return values, as specified by @code{PROMOTE_FUNCTION_ARGS}
782and @code{PROMOTE_FUNCTION_RETURN}, respectively.
783
784@findex PARM_BOUNDARY
785@item PARM_BOUNDARY
786Normal alignment required for function parameters on the stack, in
787bits. All stack parameters receive at least this much alignment
788regardless of data type. On most machines, this is the same as the
789size of an integer.
790
791@findex STACK_BOUNDARY
792@item STACK_BOUNDARY
793Define this macro if you wish to preserve a certain alignment for
794the stack pointer. The definition is a C expression
795for the desired alignment (measured in bits).
796
797@cindex @code{PUSH_ROUNDING}, interaction with @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}
798If @code{PUSH_ROUNDING} is not defined, the stack will always be aligned
799to the specified boundary. If @code{PUSH_ROUNDING} is defined and specifies a
800less strict alignment than @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}, the stack may be
801momentarily unaligned while pushing arguments.
802
803@findex FUNCTION_BOUNDARY
804@item FUNCTION_BOUNDARY
805Alignment required for a function entry point, in bits.
806
807@findex BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
808@item BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
809Biggest alignment that any data type can require on this machine, in bits.
810
861bb6c1
JL
811@findex MINIMUM_ATOMIC_ALIGNMENT
812@item MINIMUM_ATOMIC_ALIGNMENT
813If defined, the smallest alignment, in bits, that can be given to an
814object that can be referenced in one operation, without disturbing any
815nearby object. Normally, this is @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}, but may be larger
816on machines that don't have byte or half-word store operations.
817
feca2ed3
JW
818@findex BIGGEST_FIELD_ALIGNMENT
819@item BIGGEST_FIELD_ALIGNMENT
820Biggest alignment that any structure field can require on this machine,
821in bits. If defined, this overrides @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT} for
822structure fields only.
823
824@findex ADJUST_FIELD_ALIGN
825@item ADJUST_FIELD_ALIGN (@var{field}, @var{computed})
826An expression for the alignment of a structure field @var{field} if the
827alignment computed in the usual way is @var{computed}. GNU CC uses
828this value instead of the value in @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT} or
829@code{BIGGEST_FIELD_ALIGNMENT}, if defined, for structure fields only.
830
831@findex MAX_OFILE_ALIGNMENT
832@item MAX_OFILE_ALIGNMENT
833Biggest alignment supported by the object file format of this machine.
834Use this macro to limit the alignment which can be specified using the
835@code{__attribute__ ((aligned (@var{n})))} construct. If not defined,
836the default value is @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}.
837
838@findex DATA_ALIGNMENT
839@item DATA_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{basic-align})
8a198bd2
JW
840If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for a variables in
841the static store. @var{type} is the data type, and @var{basic-align} is
842the alignment that the object would ordinarily have. The value of this
feca2ed3
JW
843macro is used instead of that alignment to align the object.
844
845If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
846
847@findex strcpy
848One use of this macro is to increase alignment of medium-size data to
849make it all fit in fewer cache lines. Another is to cause character
850arrays to be word-aligned so that @code{strcpy} calls that copy
851constants to character arrays can be done inline.
852
853@findex CONSTANT_ALIGNMENT
854@item CONSTANT_ALIGNMENT (@var{constant}, @var{basic-align})
855If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment given to a constant
856that is being placed in memory. @var{constant} is the constant and
857@var{basic-align} is the alignment that the object would ordinarily
858have. The value of this macro is used instead of that alignment to
859align the object.
860
861If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
862
863The typical use of this macro is to increase alignment for string
864constants to be word aligned so that @code{strcpy} calls that copy
865constants can be done inline.
866
867@findex EMPTY_FIELD_BOUNDARY
868@item EMPTY_FIELD_BOUNDARY
869Alignment in bits to be given to a structure bit field that follows an
870empty field such as @code{int : 0;}.
871
872Note that @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS} also affects the alignment
873that results from an empty field.
874
875@findex STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY
876@item STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY
877Number of bits which any structure or union's size must be a multiple of.
878Each structure or union's size is rounded up to a multiple of this.
879
880If you do not define this macro, the default is the same as
881@code{BITS_PER_UNIT}.
882
883@findex STRICT_ALIGNMENT
884@item STRICT_ALIGNMENT
885Define this macro to be the value 1 if instructions will fail to work
886if given data not on the nominal alignment. If instructions will merely
887go slower in that case, define this macro as 0.
888
889@findex PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS
890@item PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS
891Define this if you wish to imitate the way many other C compilers handle
892alignment of bitfields and the structures that contain them.
893
894The behavior is that the type written for a bitfield (@code{int},
895@code{short}, or other integer type) imposes an alignment for the
896entire structure, as if the structure really did contain an ordinary
897field of that type. In addition, the bitfield is placed within the
898structure so that it would fit within such a field, not crossing a
899boundary for it.
900
901Thus, on most machines, a bitfield whose type is written as @code{int}
902would not cross a four-byte boundary, and would force four-byte
903alignment for the whole structure. (The alignment used may not be four
904bytes; it is controlled by the other alignment parameters.)
905
906If the macro is defined, its definition should be a C expression;
907a nonzero value for the expression enables this behavior.
908
909Note that if this macro is not defined, or its value is zero, some
910bitfields may cross more than one alignment boundary. The compiler can
911support such references if there are @samp{insv}, @samp{extv}, and
912@samp{extzv} insns that can directly reference memory.
913
914The other known way of making bitfields work is to define
915@code{STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY} as large as @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}.
916Then every structure can be accessed with fullwords.
917
918Unless the machine has bitfield instructions or you define
919@code{STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY} that way, you must define
920@code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS} to have a nonzero value.
921
922If your aim is to make GNU CC use the same conventions for laying out
923bitfields as are used by another compiler, here is how to investigate
924what the other compiler does. Compile and run this program:
925
926@example
927struct foo1
928@{
929 char x;
930 char :0;
931 char y;
932@};
933
934struct foo2
935@{
936 char x;
937 int :0;
938 char y;
939@};
940
941main ()
942@{
943 printf ("Size of foo1 is %d\n",
944 sizeof (struct foo1));
945 printf ("Size of foo2 is %d\n",
946 sizeof (struct foo2));
947 exit (0);
948@}
949@end example
950
951If this prints 2 and 5, then the compiler's behavior is what you would
952get from @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS}.
953
954@findex BITFIELD_NBYTES_LIMITED
955@item BITFIELD_NBYTES_LIMITED
956Like PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS except that its effect is limited to
957aligning a bitfield within the structure.
958
959@findex ROUND_TYPE_SIZE
960@item ROUND_TYPE_SIZE (@var{struct}, @var{size}, @var{align})
961Define this macro as an expression for the overall size of a structure
962(given by @var{struct} as a tree node) when the size computed from the
963fields is @var{size} and the alignment is @var{align}.
964
965The default is to round @var{size} up to a multiple of @var{align}.
966
967@findex ROUND_TYPE_ALIGN
968@item ROUND_TYPE_ALIGN (@var{struct}, @var{computed}, @var{specified})
969Define this macro as an expression for the alignment of a structure
970(given by @var{struct} as a tree node) if the alignment computed in the
971usual way is @var{computed} and the alignment explicitly specified was
972@var{specified}.
973
974The default is to use @var{specified} if it is larger; otherwise, use
975the smaller of @var{computed} and @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}
976
977@findex MAX_FIXED_MODE_SIZE
978@item MAX_FIXED_MODE_SIZE
979An integer expression for the size in bits of the largest integer
980machine mode that should actually be used. All integer machine modes of
981this size or smaller can be used for structures and unions with the
982appropriate sizes. If this macro is undefined, @code{GET_MODE_BITSIZE
983(DImode)} is assumed.
984
73c8090f
DE
985@findex STACK_SAVEAREA_MODE
986@item STACK_SAVEAREA_MODE (@var{save_level})
987If defined, an expression of type @code{enum machine_mode} that
39403d82
DE
988specifies the mode of the save area operand of a
989@code{save_stack_@var{level}} named pattern (@pxref{Standard Names}).
990@var{save_level} is one of @code{SAVE_BLOCK}, @code{SAVE_FUNCTION}, or
991@code{SAVE_NONLOCAL} and selects which of the three named patterns is
992having its mode specified.
73c8090f
DE
993
994You need not define this macro if it always returns @code{Pmode}. You
995would most commonly define this macro if the
996@code{save_stack_@var{level}} patterns need to support both a 32- and a
99764-bit mode.
998
39403d82
DE
999@findex STACK_SIZE_MODE
1000@item STACK_SIZE_MODE
1001If defined, an expression of type @code{enum machine_mode} that
1002specifies the mode of the size increment operand of an
1003@code{allocate_stack} named pattern (@pxref{Standard Names}).
1004
1005You need not define this macro if it always returns @code{word_mode}.
1006You would most commonly define this macro if the @code{allocate_stack}
1007pattern needs to support both a 32- and a 64-bit mode.
1008
feca2ed3
JW
1009@findex CHECK_FLOAT_VALUE
1010@item CHECK_FLOAT_VALUE (@var{mode}, @var{value}, @var{overflow})
1011A C statement to validate the value @var{value} (of type
1012@code{double}) for mode @var{mode}. This means that you check whether
1013@var{value} fits within the possible range of values for mode
1014@var{mode} on this target machine. The mode @var{mode} is always
1015a mode of class @code{MODE_FLOAT}. @var{overflow} is nonzero if
1016the value is already known to be out of range.
1017
1018If @var{value} is not valid or if @var{overflow} is nonzero, you should
1019set @var{overflow} to 1 and then assign some valid value to @var{value}.
1020Allowing an invalid value to go through the compiler can produce
1021incorrect assembler code which may even cause Unix assemblers to crash.
1022
1023This macro need not be defined if there is no work for it to do.
1024
1025@findex TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT
1026@item TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT
1027A code distinguishing the floating point format of the target machine.
1028There are three defined values:
1029
1030@table @code
1031@findex IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
1032@item IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
1033This code indicates IEEE floating point. It is the default; there is no
1034need to define this macro when the format is IEEE.
1035
1036@findex VAX_FLOAT_FORMAT
1037@item VAX_FLOAT_FORMAT
1038This code indicates the peculiar format used on the Vax.
1039
1040@findex UNKNOWN_FLOAT_FORMAT
1041@item UNKNOWN_FLOAT_FORMAT
1042This code indicates any other format.
1043@end table
1044
1045The value of this macro is compared with @code{HOST_FLOAT_FORMAT}
1046(@pxref{Config}) to determine whether the target machine has the same
1047format as the host machine. If any other formats are actually in use on
1048supported machines, new codes should be defined for them.
1049
1050The ordering of the component words of floating point values stored in
1051memory is controlled by @code{FLOAT_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN} for the target
1052machine and @code{HOST_FLOAT_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN} for the host.
e9a25f70
JL
1053
1054@findex DEFAULT_VTABLE_THUNKS
1055@item DEFAULT_VTABLE_THUNKS
1056GNU CC supports two ways of implementing C++ vtables: traditional or with
1057so-called ``thunks''. The flag @samp{-fvtable-thunk} chooses between them.
1058Define this macro to be a C expression for the default value of that flag.
1059If @code{DEFAULT_VTABLE_THUNKS} is 0, GNU CC uses the traditional
1060implementation by default. The ``thunk'' implementation is more efficient
1061(especially if you have provided an implementation of
1062@code{ASM_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK}, see @ref{Function Entry}), but is not binary
1063compatible with code compiled using the traditional implementation.
1064If you are writing a new ports, define @code{DEFAULT_VTABLE_THUNKS} to 1.
1065
1066If you do not define this macro, the default for @samp{-fvtable-thunk} is 0.
feca2ed3
JW
1067@end table
1068
1069@node Type Layout
1070@section Layout of Source Language Data Types
1071
1072These macros define the sizes and other characteristics of the standard
1073basic data types used in programs being compiled. Unlike the macros in
1074the previous section, these apply to specific features of C and related
1075languages, rather than to fundamental aspects of storage layout.
1076
1077@table @code
1078@findex INT_TYPE_SIZE
1079@item INT_TYPE_SIZE
1080A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{int} on the
1081target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1082
1083@findex MAX_INT_TYPE_SIZE
1084@item MAX_INT_TYPE_SIZE
1085Maximum number for the size in bits of the type @code{int} on the target
1086machine. If this is undefined, the default is @code{INT_TYPE_SIZE}.
1087Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the largest value that
1088@code{INT_TYPE_SIZE} can have at run-time. This is used in @code{cpp}.
1089
1090@findex SHORT_TYPE_SIZE
1091@item SHORT_TYPE_SIZE
1092A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{short} on the
1093target machine. If you don't define this, the default is half a word.
1094(If this would be less than one storage unit, it is rounded up to one
1095unit.)
1096
1097@findex LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1098@item LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1099A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long} on the
1100target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1101
1102@findex MAX_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1103@item MAX_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1104Maximum number for the size in bits of the type @code{long} on the
1105target machine. If this is undefined, the default is
1106@code{LONG_TYPE_SIZE}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
1107largest value that @code{LONG_TYPE_SIZE} can have at run-time. This is
1108used in @code{cpp}.
1109
1110@findex LONG_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1111@item LONG_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1112A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long long} on the
1113target machine. If you don't define this, the default is two
1114words. If you want to support GNU Ada on your machine, the value of
1115macro must be at least 64.
1116
1117@findex CHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1118@item CHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1119A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{char} on the
1120target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one quarter
1121of a word. (If this would be less than one storage unit, it is rounded up
1122to one unit.)
1123
1124@findex MAX_CHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1125@item MAX_CHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1126Maximum number for the size in bits of the type @code{char} on the
1127target machine. If this is undefined, the default is
1128@code{CHAR_TYPE_SIZE}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
1129largest value that @code{CHAR_TYPE_SIZE} can have at run-time. This is
1130used in @code{cpp}.
1131
1132@findex FLOAT_TYPE_SIZE
1133@item FLOAT_TYPE_SIZE
1134A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{float} on the
1135target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1136
1137@findex DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
1138@item DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
1139A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{double} on the
1140target machine. If you don't define this, the default is two
1141words.
1142
1143@findex LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
1144@item LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
1145A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long double} on
1146the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is two
1147words.
1148
e9a25f70
JL
1149@findex WIDEST_HARDWARE_FP_SIZE
1150@item WIDEST_HARDWARE_FP_SIZE
1151A C expression for the size in bits of the widest floating-point format
1152supported by the hardware. If you define this macro, you must specify a
1153value less than or equal to the value of @code{LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE}.
1154If you do not define this macro, the value of @code{LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE}
1155is the default.
1156
feca2ed3
JW
1157@findex DEFAULT_SIGNED_CHAR
1158@item DEFAULT_SIGNED_CHAR
1159An expression whose value is 1 or 0, according to whether the type
1160@code{char} should be signed or unsigned by default. The user can
1161always override this default with the options @samp{-fsigned-char}
1162and @samp{-funsigned-char}.
1163
1164@findex DEFAULT_SHORT_ENUMS
1165@item DEFAULT_SHORT_ENUMS
1166A C expression to determine whether to give an @code{enum} type
1167only as many bytes as it takes to represent the range of possible values
1168of that type. A nonzero value means to do that; a zero value means all
1169@code{enum} types should be allocated like @code{int}.
1170
1171If you don't define the macro, the default is 0.
1172
1173@findex SIZE_TYPE
1174@item SIZE_TYPE
1175A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1176for size values. The typedef name @code{size_t} is defined using the
1177contents of the string.
1178
1179The string can contain more than one keyword. If so, separate them with
1180spaces, and write first any length keyword, then @code{unsigned} if
1181appropriate, and finally @code{int}. The string must exactly match one
1182of the data type names defined in the function
1183@code{init_decl_processing} in the file @file{c-decl.c}. You may not
1184omit @code{int} or change the order---that would cause the compiler to
1185crash on startup.
1186
1187If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"long unsigned
1188int"}.
1189
1190@findex PTRDIFF_TYPE
1191@item PTRDIFF_TYPE
1192A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1193for the result of subtracting two pointers. The typedef name
1194@code{ptrdiff_t} is defined using the contents of the string. See
1195@code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more information.
1196
1197If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"long int"}.
1198
1199@findex WCHAR_TYPE
1200@item WCHAR_TYPE
1201A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1202for wide characters. The typedef name @code{wchar_t} is defined using
1203the contents of the string. See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more
1204information.
1205
1206If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"int"}.
1207
1208@findex WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1209@item WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1210A C expression for the size in bits of the data type for wide
1211characters. This is used in @code{cpp}, which cannot make use of
1212@code{WCHAR_TYPE}.
1213
1214@findex MAX_WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1215@item MAX_WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1216Maximum number for the size in bits of the data type for wide
1217characters. If this is undefined, the default is
1218@code{WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
1219largest value that @code{WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE} can have at run-time. This is
1220used in @code{cpp}.
1221
1222@findex OBJC_INT_SELECTORS
1223@item OBJC_INT_SELECTORS
1224Define this macro if the type of Objective C selectors should be
1225@code{int}.
1226
1227If this macro is not defined, then selectors should have the type
1228@code{struct objc_selector *}.
1229
1230@findex OBJC_SELECTORS_WITHOUT_LABELS
1231@item OBJC_SELECTORS_WITHOUT_LABELS
1232Define this macro if the compiler can group all the selectors together
1233into a vector and use just one label at the beginning of the vector.
1234Otherwise, the compiler must give each selector its own assembler
1235label.
1236
1237On certain machines, it is important to have a separate label for each
1238selector because this enables the linker to eliminate duplicate selectors.
1239
1240@findex TARGET_BELL
1241@item TARGET_BELL
1242A C constant expression for the integer value for escape sequence
1243@samp{\a}.
1244
1245@findex TARGET_TAB
1246@findex TARGET_BS
1247@findex TARGET_NEWLINE
1248@item TARGET_BS
1249@itemx TARGET_TAB
1250@itemx TARGET_NEWLINE
1251C constant expressions for the integer values for escape sequences
1252@samp{\b}, @samp{\t} and @samp{\n}.
1253
1254@findex TARGET_VT
1255@findex TARGET_FF
1256@findex TARGET_CR
1257@item TARGET_VT
1258@itemx TARGET_FF
1259@itemx TARGET_CR
1260C constant expressions for the integer values for escape sequences
1261@samp{\v}, @samp{\f} and @samp{\r}.
1262@end table
1263
1264@node Registers
1265@section Register Usage
1266@cindex register usage
1267
1268This section explains how to describe what registers the target machine
1269has, and how (in general) they can be used.
1270
1271The description of which registers a specific instruction can use is
1272done with register classes; see @ref{Register Classes}. For information
1273on using registers to access a stack frame, see @ref{Frame Registers}.
1274For passing values in registers, see @ref{Register Arguments}.
1275For returning values in registers, see @ref{Scalar Return}.
1276
1277@menu
1278* Register Basics:: Number and kinds of registers.
1279* Allocation Order:: Order in which registers are allocated.
1280* Values in Registers:: What kinds of values each reg can hold.
1281* Leaf Functions:: Renumbering registers for leaf functions.
1282* Stack Registers:: Handling a register stack such as 80387.
1283* Obsolete Register Macros:: Macros formerly used for the 80387.
1284@end menu
1285
1286@node Register Basics
1287@subsection Basic Characteristics of Registers
1288
1289@c prevent bad page break with this line
1290Registers have various characteristics.
1291
1292@table @code
1293@findex FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1294@item FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1295Number of hardware registers known to the compiler. They receive
1296numbers 0 through @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER-1}; thus, the first
1297pseudo register's number really is assigned the number
1298@code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER}.
1299
1300@item FIXED_REGISTERS
1301@findex FIXED_REGISTERS
1302@cindex fixed register
1303An initializer that says which registers are used for fixed purposes
1304all throughout the compiled code and are therefore not available for
1305general allocation. These would include the stack pointer, the frame
1306pointer (except on machines where that can be used as a general
1307register when no frame pointer is needed), the program counter on
1308machines where that is considered one of the addressable registers,
1309and any other numbered register with a standard use.
1310
1311This information is expressed as a sequence of numbers, separated by
1312commas and surrounded by braces. The @var{n}th number is 1 if
1313register @var{n} is fixed, 0 otherwise.
1314
1315The table initialized from this macro, and the table initialized by
1316the following one, may be overridden at run time either automatically,
1317by the actions of the macro @code{CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE}, or by
1318the user with the command options @samp{-ffixed-@var{reg}},
1319@samp{-fcall-used-@var{reg}} and @samp{-fcall-saved-@var{reg}}.
1320
1321@findex CALL_USED_REGISTERS
1322@item CALL_USED_REGISTERS
1323@cindex call-used register
1324@cindex call-clobbered register
1325@cindex call-saved register
1326Like @code{FIXED_REGISTERS} but has 1 for each register that is
1327clobbered (in general) by function calls as well as for fixed
1328registers. This macro therefore identifies the registers that are not
1329available for general allocation of values that must live across
1330function calls.
1331
1332If a register has 0 in @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS}, the compiler
1333automatically saves it on function entry and restores it on function
1334exit, if the register is used within the function.
1335
1336@findex CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE
1337@findex fixed_regs
1338@findex call_used_regs
1339@item CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE
1340Zero or more C statements that may conditionally modify two variables
1341@code{fixed_regs} and @code{call_used_regs} (both of type @code{char
1342[]}) after they have been initialized from the two preceding macros.
1343
1344This is necessary in case the fixed or call-clobbered registers depend
1345on target flags.
1346
1347You need not define this macro if it has no work to do.
1348
1349@cindex disabling certain registers
1350@cindex controlling register usage
1351If the usage of an entire class of registers depends on the target
1352flags, you may indicate this to GCC by using this macro to modify
1353@code{fixed_regs} and @code{call_used_regs} to 1 for each of the
1354registers in the classes which should not be used by GCC. Also define
1355the macro @code{REG_CLASS_FROM_LETTER} to return @code{NO_REGS} if it
1356is called with a letter for a class that shouldn't be used.
1357
1358(However, if this class is not included in @code{GENERAL_REGS} and all
1359of the insn patterns whose constraints permit this class are
1360controlled by target switches, then GCC will automatically avoid using
1361these registers when the target switches are opposed to them.)
1362
1363@findex NON_SAVING_SETJMP
1364@item NON_SAVING_SETJMP
1365If this macro is defined and has a nonzero value, it means that
1366@code{setjmp} and related functions fail to save the registers, or that
1367@code{longjmp} fails to restore them. To compensate, the compiler
1368avoids putting variables in registers in functions that use
1369@code{setjmp}.
1370
1371@findex INCOMING_REGNO
1372@item INCOMING_REGNO (@var{out})
1373Define this macro if the target machine has register windows. This C
1374expression returns the register number as seen by the called function
1375corresponding to the register number @var{out} as seen by the calling
1376function. Return @var{out} if register number @var{out} is not an
1377outbound register.
1378
1379@findex OUTGOING_REGNO
1380@item OUTGOING_REGNO (@var{in})
1381Define this macro if the target machine has register windows. This C
1382expression returns the register number as seen by the calling function
1383corresponding to the register number @var{in} as seen by the called
1384function. Return @var{in} if register number @var{in} is not an inbound
1385register.
1386
1387@ignore
1388@findex PC_REGNUM
1389@item PC_REGNUM
1390If the program counter has a register number, define this as that
1391register number. Otherwise, do not define it.
1392@end ignore
1393@end table
1394
1395@node Allocation Order
1396@subsection Order of Allocation of Registers
1397@cindex order of register allocation
1398@cindex register allocation order
1399
1400@c prevent bad page break with this line
1401Registers are allocated in order.
1402
1403@table @code
1404@findex REG_ALLOC_ORDER
1405@item REG_ALLOC_ORDER
1406If defined, an initializer for a vector of integers, containing the
1407numbers of hard registers in the order in which GNU CC should prefer
1408to use them (from most preferred to least).
1409
1410If this macro is not defined, registers are used lowest numbered first
1411(all else being equal).
1412
1413One use of this macro is on machines where the highest numbered
1414registers must always be saved and the save-multiple-registers
1415instruction supports only sequences of consecutive registers. On such
1416machines, define @code{REG_ALLOC_ORDER} to be an initializer that lists
956d6950 1417the highest numbered allocable register first.
feca2ed3
JW
1418
1419@findex ORDER_REGS_FOR_LOCAL_ALLOC
1420@item ORDER_REGS_FOR_LOCAL_ALLOC
1421A C statement (sans semicolon) to choose the order in which to allocate
1422hard registers for pseudo-registers local to a basic block.
1423
1424Store the desired register order in the array @code{reg_alloc_order}.
1425Element 0 should be the register to allocate first; element 1, the next
1426register; and so on.
1427
1428The macro body should not assume anything about the contents of
1429@code{reg_alloc_order} before execution of the macro.
1430
1431On most machines, it is not necessary to define this macro.
1432@end table
1433
1434@node Values in Registers
1435@subsection How Values Fit in Registers
1436
1437This section discusses the macros that describe which kinds of values
1438(specifically, which machine modes) each register can hold, and how many
1439consecutive registers are needed for a given mode.
1440
1441@table @code
1442@findex HARD_REGNO_NREGS
1443@item HARD_REGNO_NREGS (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1444A C expression for the number of consecutive hard registers, starting
1445at register number @var{regno}, required to hold a value of mode
1446@var{mode}.
1447
1448On a machine where all registers are exactly one word, a suitable
1449definition of this macro is
1450
1451@smallexample
1452#define HARD_REGNO_NREGS(REGNO, MODE) \
1453 ((GET_MODE_SIZE (MODE) + UNITS_PER_WORD - 1) \
1454 / UNITS_PER_WORD))
1455@end smallexample
1456
ce4d78eb
RH
1457@findex ALTER_HARD_SUBREG
1458@item ALTER_HARD_SUBREG (@var{tgt_mode}, @var{word}, @var{src_mode}, @var{regno})
1459A C expression that returns an adjusted hard register number for
1460
1461@smallexample
1462(subreg:@var{tgt_mode} (reg:@var{src_mode} @var{regno}) @var{word})
1463@end smallexample
1464
1465This may be needed if the target machine has mixed sized big-endian
1466registers, like Sparc v9.
1467
feca2ed3
JW
1468@findex HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK
1469@item HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1470A C expression that is nonzero if it is permissible to store a value
1471of mode @var{mode} in hard register number @var{regno} (or in several
1472registers starting with that one). For a machine where all registers
1473are equivalent, a suitable definition is
1474
1475@smallexample
1476#define HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK(REGNO, MODE) 1
1477@end smallexample
1478
e9a25f70
JL
1479You need not include code to check for the numbers of fixed registers,
1480because the allocation mechanism considers them to be always occupied.
feca2ed3
JW
1481
1482@cindex register pairs
1483On some machines, double-precision values must be kept in even/odd
e9a25f70
JL
1484register pairs. You can implement that by defining this macro to reject
1485odd register numbers for such modes.
feca2ed3
JW
1486
1487The minimum requirement for a mode to be OK in a register is that the
1488@samp{mov@var{mode}} instruction pattern support moves between the
e9a25f70
JL
1489register and other hard register in the same class and that moving a
1490value into the register and back out not alter it.
feca2ed3 1491
e9a25f70
JL
1492Since the same instruction used to move @code{word_mode} will work for
1493all narrower integer modes, it is not necessary on any machine for
feca2ed3
JW
1494@code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK} to distinguish between these modes, provided
1495you define patterns @samp{movhi}, etc., to take advantage of this. This
1496is useful because of the interaction between @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK}
1497and @code{MODES_TIEABLE_P}; it is very desirable for all integer modes
1498to be tieable.
1499
1500Many machines have special registers for floating point arithmetic.
1501Often people assume that floating point machine modes are allowed only
1502in floating point registers. This is not true. Any registers that
1503can hold integers can safely @emph{hold} a floating point machine
1504mode, whether or not floating arithmetic can be done on it in those
1505registers. Integer move instructions can be used to move the values.
1506
1507On some machines, though, the converse is true: fixed-point machine
1508modes may not go in floating registers. This is true if the floating
1509registers normalize any value stored in them, because storing a
1510non-floating value there would garble it. In this case,
1511@code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK} should reject fixed-point machine modes in
1512floating registers. But if the floating registers do not automatically
1513normalize, if you can store any bit pattern in one and retrieve it
1514unchanged without a trap, then any machine mode may go in a floating
1515register, so you can define this macro to say so.
1516
1517The primary significance of special floating registers is rather that
1518they are the registers acceptable in floating point arithmetic
1519instructions. However, this is of no concern to
1520@code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK}. You handle it by writing the proper
1521constraints for those instructions.
1522
1523On some machines, the floating registers are especially slow to access,
1524so that it is better to store a value in a stack frame than in such a
1525register if floating point arithmetic is not being done. As long as the
1526floating registers are not in class @code{GENERAL_REGS}, they will not
1527be used unless some pattern's constraint asks for one.
1528
1529@findex MODES_TIEABLE_P
1530@item MODES_TIEABLE_P (@var{mode1}, @var{mode2})
e9a25f70 1531A C expression that is nonzero if a value of mode
956d6950 1532@var{mode1} is accessible in mode @var{mode2} without copying.
feca2ed3
JW
1533
1534If @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (@var{r}, @var{mode1})} and
e9a25f70
JL
1535@code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (@var{r}, @var{mode2})} are always the same for
1536any @var{r}, then @code{MODES_TIEABLE_P (@var{mode1}, @var{mode2})}
1537should be nonzero. If they differ for any @var{r}, you should define
1538this macro to return zero unless some other mechanism ensures the
956d6950 1539accessibility of the value in a narrower mode.
e9a25f70
JL
1540
1541You should define this macro to return nonzero in as many cases as
1542possible since doing so will allow GNU CC to perform better register
1543allocation.
7506f491
DE
1544
1545@findex AVOID_CCMODE_COPIES
1546@item AVOID_CCMODE_COPIES
1547Define this macro if the compiler should avoid copies to/from @code{CCmode}
1548registers. You should only define this macro if support fo copying to/from
1549@code{CCmode} is incomplete.
feca2ed3
JW
1550@end table
1551
1552@node Leaf Functions
1553@subsection Handling Leaf Functions
1554
1555@cindex leaf functions
1556@cindex functions, leaf
1557On some machines, a leaf function (i.e., one which makes no calls) can run
1558more efficiently if it does not make its own register window. Often this
1559means it is required to receive its arguments in the registers where they
1560are passed by the caller, instead of the registers where they would
1561normally arrive.
1562
1563The special treatment for leaf functions generally applies only when
1564other conditions are met; for example, often they may use only those
1565registers for its own variables and temporaries. We use the term ``leaf
1566function'' to mean a function that is suitable for this special
1567handling, so that functions with no calls are not necessarily ``leaf
1568functions''.
1569
1570GNU CC assigns register numbers before it knows whether the function is
1571suitable for leaf function treatment. So it needs to renumber the
1572registers in order to output a leaf function. The following macros
1573accomplish this.
1574
1575@table @code
1576@findex LEAF_REGISTERS
1577@item LEAF_REGISTERS
1578A C initializer for a vector, indexed by hard register number, which
1579contains 1 for a register that is allowable in a candidate for leaf
1580function treatment.
1581
1582If leaf function treatment involves renumbering the registers, then the
1583registers marked here should be the ones before renumbering---those that
1584GNU CC would ordinarily allocate. The registers which will actually be
1585used in the assembler code, after renumbering, should not be marked with 1
1586in this vector.
1587
1588Define this macro only if the target machine offers a way to optimize
1589the treatment of leaf functions.
1590
1591@findex LEAF_REG_REMAP
1592@item LEAF_REG_REMAP (@var{regno})
1593A C expression whose value is the register number to which @var{regno}
1594should be renumbered, when a function is treated as a leaf function.
1595
1596If @var{regno} is a register number which should not appear in a leaf
1597function before renumbering, then the expression should yield -1, which
1598will cause the compiler to abort.
1599
1600Define this macro only if the target machine offers a way to optimize the
1601treatment of leaf functions, and registers need to be renumbered to do
1602this.
1603@end table
1604
1605@findex leaf_function
1606Normally, @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} must
1607treat leaf functions specially. It can test the C variable
1608@code{leaf_function} which is nonzero for leaf functions. (The variable
1609@code{leaf_function} is defined only if @code{LEAF_REGISTERS} is
1610defined.)
1611@c changed this to fix overfull. ALSO: why the "it" at the beginning
1612@c of the next paragraph?! --mew 2feb93
1613
1614@node Stack Registers
1615@subsection Registers That Form a Stack
1616
1617There are special features to handle computers where some of the
1618``registers'' form a stack, as in the 80387 coprocessor for the 80386.
1619Stack registers are normally written by pushing onto the stack, and are
1620numbered relative to the top of the stack.
1621
1622Currently, GNU CC can only handle one group of stack-like registers, and
1623they must be consecutively numbered.
1624
1625@table @code
1626@findex STACK_REGS
1627@item STACK_REGS
1628Define this if the machine has any stack-like registers.
1629
1630@findex FIRST_STACK_REG
1631@item FIRST_STACK_REG
1632The number of the first stack-like register. This one is the top
1633of the stack.
1634
1635@findex LAST_STACK_REG
1636@item LAST_STACK_REG
1637The number of the last stack-like register. This one is the bottom of
1638the stack.
1639@end table
1640
1641@node Obsolete Register Macros
1642@subsection Obsolete Macros for Controlling Register Usage
1643
1644These features do not work very well. They exist because they used to
1645be required to generate correct code for the 80387 coprocessor of the
164680386. They are no longer used by that machine description and may be
1647removed in a later version of the compiler. Don't use them!
1648
1649@table @code
1650@findex OVERLAPPING_REGNO_P
1651@item OVERLAPPING_REGNO_P (@var{regno})
1652If defined, this is a C expression whose value is nonzero if hard
1653register number @var{regno} is an overlapping register. This means a
1654hard register which overlaps a hard register with a different number.
1655(Such overlap is undesirable, but occasionally it allows a machine to
1656be supported which otherwise could not be.) This macro must return
1657nonzero for @emph{all} the registers which overlap each other. GNU CC
1658can use an overlapping register only in certain limited ways. It can
1659be used for allocation within a basic block, and may be spilled for
1660reloading; that is all.
1661
1662If this macro is not defined, it means that none of the hard registers
1663overlap each other. This is the usual situation.
1664
1665@findex INSN_CLOBBERS_REGNO_P
1666@item INSN_CLOBBERS_REGNO_P (@var{insn}, @var{regno})
1667If defined, this is a C expression whose value should be nonzero if
1668the insn @var{insn} has the effect of mysteriously clobbering the
1669contents of hard register number @var{regno}. By ``mysterious'' we
1670mean that the insn's RTL expression doesn't describe such an effect.
1671
1672If this macro is not defined, it means that no insn clobbers registers
1673mysteriously. This is the usual situation; all else being equal,
1674it is best for the RTL expression to show all the activity.
1675
1676@cindex death notes
1677@findex PRESERVE_DEATH_INFO_REGNO_P
1678@item PRESERVE_DEATH_INFO_REGNO_P (@var{regno})
1679If defined, this is a C expression whose value is nonzero if correct
1680@code{REG_DEAD} notes are needed for hard register number @var{regno}
1681after reload.
1682
1683You would arrange to preserve death info for a register when some of the
1684code in the machine description which is executed to write the assembler
1685code looks at the death notes. This is necessary only when the actual
1686hardware feature which GNU CC thinks of as a register is not actually a
1687register of the usual sort. (It might, for example, be a hardware
1688stack.)
1689
1690It is also useful for peepholes and linker relaxation.
1691
1692If this macro is not defined, it means that no death notes need to be
1693preserved, and some may even be incorrect. This is the usual situation.
1694@end table
1695
1696@node Register Classes
1697@section Register Classes
1698@cindex register class definitions
1699@cindex class definitions, register
1700
1701On many machines, the numbered registers are not all equivalent.
1702For example, certain registers may not be allowed for indexed addressing;
1703certain registers may not be allowed in some instructions. These machine
1704restrictions are described to the compiler using @dfn{register classes}.
1705
1706You define a number of register classes, giving each one a name and saying
1707which of the registers belong to it. Then you can specify register classes
1708that are allowed as operands to particular instruction patterns.
1709
1710@findex ALL_REGS
1711@findex NO_REGS
1712In general, each register will belong to several classes. In fact, one
1713class must be named @code{ALL_REGS} and contain all the registers. Another
1714class must be named @code{NO_REGS} and contain no registers. Often the
1715union of two classes will be another class; however, this is not required.
1716
1717@findex GENERAL_REGS
1718One of the classes must be named @code{GENERAL_REGS}. There is nothing
1719terribly special about the name, but the operand constraint letters
1720@samp{r} and @samp{g} specify this class. If @code{GENERAL_REGS} is
1721the same as @code{ALL_REGS}, just define it as a macro which expands
1722to @code{ALL_REGS}.
1723
1724Order the classes so that if class @var{x} is contained in class @var{y}
1725then @var{x} has a lower class number than @var{y}.
1726
1727The way classes other than @code{GENERAL_REGS} are specified in operand
1728constraints is through machine-dependent operand constraint letters.
1729You can define such letters to correspond to various classes, then use
1730them in operand constraints.
1731
1732You should define a class for the union of two classes whenever some
1733instruction allows both classes. For example, if an instruction allows
1734either a floating point (coprocessor) register or a general register for a
1735certain operand, you should define a class @code{FLOAT_OR_GENERAL_REGS}
1736which includes both of them. Otherwise you will get suboptimal code.
1737
1738You must also specify certain redundant information about the register
1739classes: for each class, which classes contain it and which ones are
1740contained in it; for each pair of classes, the largest class contained
1741in their union.
1742
1743When a value occupying several consecutive registers is expected in a
1744certain class, all the registers used must belong to that class.
1745Therefore, register classes cannot be used to enforce a requirement for
1746a register pair to start with an even-numbered register. The way to
1747specify this requirement is with @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK}.
1748
1749Register classes used for input-operands of bitwise-and or shift
1750instructions have a special requirement: each such class must have, for
1751each fixed-point machine mode, a subclass whose registers can transfer that
1752mode to or from memory. For example, on some machines, the operations for
1753single-byte values (@code{QImode}) are limited to certain registers. When
1754this is so, each register class that is used in a bitwise-and or shift
1755instruction must have a subclass consisting of registers from which
1756single-byte values can be loaded or stored. This is so that
1757@code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS} can always have a possible value to return.
1758
1759@table @code
1760@findex enum reg_class
1761@item enum reg_class
1762An enumeral type that must be defined with all the register class names
1763as enumeral values. @code{NO_REGS} must be first. @code{ALL_REGS}
1764must be the last register class, followed by one more enumeral value,
1765@code{LIM_REG_CLASSES}, which is not a register class but rather
1766tells how many classes there are.
1767
1768Each register class has a number, which is the value of casting
1769the class name to type @code{int}. The number serves as an index
1770in many of the tables described below.
1771
1772@findex N_REG_CLASSES
1773@item N_REG_CLASSES
1774The number of distinct register classes, defined as follows:
1775
1776@example
1777#define N_REG_CLASSES (int) LIM_REG_CLASSES
1778@end example
1779
1780@findex REG_CLASS_NAMES
1781@item REG_CLASS_NAMES
1782An initializer containing the names of the register classes as C string
1783constants. These names are used in writing some of the debugging dumps.
1784
1785@findex REG_CLASS_CONTENTS
1786@item REG_CLASS_CONTENTS
1787An initializer containing the contents of the register classes, as integers
1788which are bit masks. The @var{n}th integer specifies the contents of class
1789@var{n}. The way the integer @var{mask} is interpreted is that
1790register @var{r} is in the class if @code{@var{mask} & (1 << @var{r})} is 1.
1791
1792When the machine has more than 32 registers, an integer does not suffice.
1793Then the integers are replaced by sub-initializers, braced groupings containing
1794several integers. Each sub-initializer must be suitable as an initializer
1795for the type @code{HARD_REG_SET} which is defined in @file{hard-reg-set.h}.
1796
1797@findex REGNO_REG_CLASS
1798@item REGNO_REG_CLASS (@var{regno})
1799A C expression whose value is a register class containing hard register
1800@var{regno}. In general there is more than one such class; choose a class
1801which is @dfn{minimal}, meaning that no smaller class also contains the
1802register.
1803
1804@findex BASE_REG_CLASS
1805@item BASE_REG_CLASS
1806A macro whose definition is the name of the class to which a valid
1807base register must belong. A base register is one used in an address
1808which is the register value plus a displacement.
1809
1810@findex INDEX_REG_CLASS
1811@item INDEX_REG_CLASS
1812A macro whose definition is the name of the class to which a valid
1813index register must belong. An index register is one used in an
1814address where its value is either multiplied by a scale factor or
1815added to another register (as well as added to a displacement).
1816
1817@findex REG_CLASS_FROM_LETTER
1818@item REG_CLASS_FROM_LETTER (@var{char})
1819A C expression which defines the machine-dependent operand constraint
1820letters for register classes. If @var{char} is such a letter, the
1821value should be the register class corresponding to it. Otherwise,
1822the value should be @code{NO_REGS}. The register letter @samp{r},
1823corresponding to class @code{GENERAL_REGS}, will not be passed
1824to this macro; you do not need to handle it.
1825
1826@findex REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P
1827@item REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{num})
1828A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is
1829suitable for use as a base register in operand addresses. It may be
1830either a suitable hard register or a pseudo register that has been
1831allocated such a hard register.
1832
861bb6c1
JL
1833@findex REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P
1834@item REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{num}, @var{mode})
1835A C expression that is just like @code{REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P}, except that
1836that expression may examine the mode of the memory reference in
1837@var{mode}. You should define this macro if the mode of the memory
1838reference affects whether a register may be used as a base register. If
1839you define this macro, the compiler will use it instead of
1840@code{REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P}.
1841
feca2ed3
JW
1842@findex REGNO_OK_FOR_INDEX_P
1843@item REGNO_OK_FOR_INDEX_P (@var{num})
1844A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is
1845suitable for use as an index register in operand addresses. It may be
1846either a suitable hard register or a pseudo register that has been
1847allocated such a hard register.
1848
1849The difference between an index register and a base register is that
1850the index register may be scaled. If an address involves the sum of
1851two registers, neither one of them scaled, then either one may be
1852labeled the ``base'' and the other the ``index''; but whichever
1853labeling is used must fit the machine's constraints of which registers
1854may serve in each capacity. The compiler will try both labelings,
1855looking for one that is valid, and will reload one or both registers
1856only if neither labeling works.
1857
1858@findex PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS
1859@item PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{x}, @var{class})
1860A C expression that places additional restrictions on the register class
1861to use when it is necessary to copy value @var{x} into a register in class
1862@var{class}. The value is a register class; perhaps @var{class}, or perhaps
1863another, smaller class. On many machines, the following definition is
1864safe:
1865
1866@example
1867#define PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS(X,CLASS) CLASS
1868@end example
1869
1870Sometimes returning a more restrictive class makes better code. For
1871example, on the 68000, when @var{x} is an integer constant that is in range
1872for a @samp{moveq} instruction, the value of this macro is always
1873@code{DATA_REGS} as long as @var{class} includes the data registers.
1874Requiring a data register guarantees that a @samp{moveq} will be used.
1875
1876If @var{x} is a @code{const_double}, by returning @code{NO_REGS}
1877you can force @var{x} into a memory constant. This is useful on
1878certain machines where immediate floating values cannot be loaded into
1879certain kinds of registers.
1880
1881@findex PREFERRED_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS
1882@item PREFERRED_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{x}, @var{class})
1883Like @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS}, but for output reloads instead of
1884input reloads. If you don't define this macro, the default is to use
1885@var{class}, unchanged.
1886
1887@findex LIMIT_RELOAD_CLASS
1888@item LIMIT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{mode}, @var{class})
1889A C expression that places additional restrictions on the register class
1890to use when it is necessary to be able to hold a value of mode
1891@var{mode} in a reload register for which class @var{class} would
1892ordinarily be used.
1893
1894Unlike @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS}, this macro should be used when
1895there are certain modes that simply can't go in certain reload classes.
1896
1897The value is a register class; perhaps @var{class}, or perhaps another,
1898smaller class.
1899
1900Don't define this macro unless the target machine has limitations which
1901require the macro to do something nontrivial.
1902
1903@findex SECONDARY_RELOAD_CLASS
1904@findex SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS
1905@findex SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS
1906@item SECONDARY_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
1907@itemx SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
1908@itemx SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
1909Many machines have some registers that cannot be copied directly to or
1910from memory or even from other types of registers. An example is the
1911@samp{MQ} register, which on most machines, can only be copied to or
1912from general registers, but not memory. Some machines allow copying all
1913registers to and from memory, but require a scratch register for stores
1914to some memory locations (e.g., those with symbolic address on the RT,
1915and those with certain symbolic address on the Sparc when compiling
1916PIC). In some cases, both an intermediate and a scratch register are
1917required.
1918
1919You should define these macros to indicate to the reload phase that it may
1920need to allocate at least one register for a reload in addition to the
1921register to contain the data. Specifically, if copying @var{x} to a
1922register @var{class} in @var{mode} requires an intermediate register,
1923you should define @code{SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS} to return the
1924largest register class all of whose registers can be used as
1925intermediate registers or scratch registers.
1926
1927If copying a register @var{class} in @var{mode} to @var{x} requires an
1928intermediate or scratch register, @code{SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS}
1929should be defined to return the largest register class required. If the
1930requirements for input and output reloads are the same, the macro
1931@code{SECONDARY_RELOAD_CLASS} should be used instead of defining both
1932macros identically.
1933
1934The values returned by these macros are often @code{GENERAL_REGS}.
1935Return @code{NO_REGS} if no spare register is needed; i.e., if @var{x}
1936can be directly copied to or from a register of @var{class} in
1937@var{mode} without requiring a scratch register. Do not define this
1938macro if it would always return @code{NO_REGS}.
1939
1940If a scratch register is required (either with or without an
1941intermediate register), you should define patterns for
1942@samp{reload_in@var{m}} or @samp{reload_out@var{m}}, as required
1943(@pxref{Standard Names}. These patterns, which will normally be
1944implemented with a @code{define_expand}, should be similar to the
1945@samp{mov@var{m}} patterns, except that operand 2 is the scratch
1946register.
1947
1948Define constraints for the reload register and scratch register that
1949contain a single register class. If the original reload register (whose
1950class is @var{class}) can meet the constraint given in the pattern, the
1951value returned by these macros is used for the class of the scratch
1952register. Otherwise, two additional reload registers are required.
1953Their classes are obtained from the constraints in the insn pattern.
1954
1955@var{x} might be a pseudo-register or a @code{subreg} of a
1956pseudo-register, which could either be in a hard register or in memory.
1957Use @code{true_regnum} to find out; it will return -1 if the pseudo is
1958in memory and the hard register number if it is in a register.
1959
1960These macros should not be used in the case where a particular class of
1961registers can only be copied to memory and not to another class of
1962registers. In that case, secondary reload registers are not needed and
1963would not be helpful. Instead, a stack location must be used to perform
1964the copy and the @code{mov@var{m}} pattern should use memory as a
1965intermediate storage. This case often occurs between floating-point and
1966general registers.
1967
1968@findex SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED
1969@item SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED (@var{class1}, @var{class2}, @var{m})
1970Certain machines have the property that some registers cannot be copied
1971to some other registers without using memory. Define this macro on
1972those machines to be a C expression that is non-zero if objects of mode
1973@var{m} in registers of @var{class1} can only be copied to registers of
1974class @var{class2} by storing a register of @var{class1} into memory
1975and loading that memory location into a register of @var{class2}.
1976
1977Do not define this macro if its value would always be zero.
1978
1979@findex SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_RTX
1980@item SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_RTX (@var{mode})
1981Normally when @code{SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED} is defined, the compiler
1982allocates a stack slot for a memory location needed for register copies.
1983If this macro is defined, the compiler instead uses the memory location
1984defined by this macro.
1985
1986Do not define this macro if you do not define
1987@code{SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED}.
1988
1989@findex SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_MODE
1990@item SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_MODE (@var{mode})
1991When the compiler needs a secondary memory location to copy between two
1992registers of mode @var{mode}, it normally allocates sufficient memory to
1993hold a quantity of @code{BITS_PER_WORD} bits and performs the store and
1994load operations in a mode that many bits wide and whose class is the
1995same as that of @var{mode}.
1996
1997This is right thing to do on most machines because it ensures that all
1998bits of the register are copied and prevents accesses to the registers
1999in a narrower mode, which some machines prohibit for floating-point
2000registers.
2001
2002However, this default behavior is not correct on some machines, such as
2003the DEC Alpha, that store short integers in floating-point registers
2004differently than in integer registers. On those machines, the default
2005widening will not work correctly and you must define this macro to
2006suppress that widening in some cases. See the file @file{alpha.h} for
2007details.
2008
2009Do not define this macro if you do not define
2010@code{SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED} or if widening @var{mode} to a mode that
2011is @code{BITS_PER_WORD} bits wide is correct for your machine.
2012
2013@findex SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES
2014@item SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES
2015Normally the compiler avoids choosing registers that have been
2016explicitly mentioned in the rtl as spill registers (these registers are
2017normally those used to pass parameters and return values). However,
2018some machines have so few registers of certain classes that there
2019would not be enough registers to use as spill registers if this were
2020done.
2021
861bb6c1
JL
2022Define @code{SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES} to be an expression with a non-zero
2023value on these machines. When this macro has a non-zero value, the
2024compiler allows registers explicitly used in the rtl to be used as spill
2025registers but avoids extending the lifetime of these registers.
feca2ed3 2026
861bb6c1
JL
2027It is always safe to define this macro with a non-zero value, but if you
2028unnecessarily define it, you will reduce the amount of optimizations
2029that can be performed in some cases. If you do not define this macro
2030with a non-zero value when it is required, the compiler will run out of
2031spill registers and print a fatal error message. For most machines, you
2032should not define this macro at all.
feca2ed3
JW
2033
2034@findex CLASS_LIKELY_SPILLED_P
2035@item CLASS_LIKELY_SPILLED_P (@var{class})
2036A C expression whose value is nonzero if pseudos that have been assigned
2037to registers of class @var{class} would likely be spilled because
2038registers of @var{class} are needed for spill registers.
2039
2040The default value of this macro returns 1 if @var{class} has exactly one
2041register and zero otherwise. On most machines, this default should be
40687a9e 2042used. Only define this macro to some other expression if pseudos
feca2ed3
JW
2043allocated by @file{local-alloc.c} end up in memory because their hard
2044registers were needed for spill registers. If this macro returns nonzero
2045for those classes, those pseudos will only be allocated by
2046@file{global.c}, which knows how to reallocate the pseudo to another
2047register. If there would not be another register available for
2048reallocation, you should not change the definition of this macro since
2049the only effect of such a definition would be to slow down register
2050allocation.
2051
2052@findex CLASS_MAX_NREGS
2053@item CLASS_MAX_NREGS (@var{class}, @var{mode})
2054A C expression for the maximum number of consecutive registers
2055of class @var{class} needed to hold a value of mode @var{mode}.
2056
2057This is closely related to the macro @code{HARD_REGNO_NREGS}. In fact,
2058the value of the macro @code{CLASS_MAX_NREGS (@var{class}, @var{mode})}
2059should be the maximum value of @code{HARD_REGNO_NREGS (@var{regno},
2060@var{mode})} for all @var{regno} values in the class @var{class}.
2061
2062This macro helps control the handling of multiple-word values
2063in the reload pass.
2064
2065@item CLASS_CANNOT_CHANGE_SIZE
2066If defined, a C expression for a class that contains registers which the
2067compiler must always access in a mode that is the same size as the mode
2068in which it loaded the register.
2069
2070For the example, loading 32-bit integer or floating-point objects into
2071floating-point registers on the Alpha extends them to 64-bits.
2072Therefore loading a 64-bit object and then storing it as a 32-bit object
2073does not store the low-order 32-bits, as would be the case for a normal
2074register. Therefore, @file{alpha.h} defines this macro as
2075@code{FLOAT_REGS}.
2076@end table
2077
2078Three other special macros describe which operands fit which constraint
2079letters.
2080
2081@table @code
2082@findex CONST_OK_FOR_LETTER_P
2083@item CONST_OK_FOR_LETTER_P (@var{value}, @var{c})
e119b68c
MM
2084A C expression that defines the machine-dependent operand constraint
2085letters (@samp{I}, @samp{J}, @samp{K}, @dots{} @samp{P}) that specify
2086particular ranges of integer values. If @var{c} is one of those
2087letters, the expression should check that @var{value}, an integer, is in
2088the appropriate range and return 1 if so, 0 otherwise. If @var{c} is
2089not one of those letters, the value should be 0 regardless of
2090@var{value}.
feca2ed3
JW
2091
2092@findex CONST_DOUBLE_OK_FOR_LETTER_P
2093@item CONST_DOUBLE_OK_FOR_LETTER_P (@var{value}, @var{c})
2094A C expression that defines the machine-dependent operand constraint
e119b68c
MM
2095letters that specify particular ranges of @code{const_double} values
2096(@samp{G} or @samp{H}).
feca2ed3
JW
2097
2098If @var{c} is one of those letters, the expression should check that
2099@var{value}, an RTX of code @code{const_double}, is in the appropriate
2100range and return 1 if so, 0 otherwise. If @var{c} is not one of those
2101letters, the value should be 0 regardless of @var{value}.
2102
2103@code{const_double} is used for all floating-point constants and for
2104@code{DImode} fixed-point constants. A given letter can accept either
2105or both kinds of values. It can use @code{GET_MODE} to distinguish
2106between these kinds.
2107
2108@findex EXTRA_CONSTRAINT
2109@item EXTRA_CONSTRAINT (@var{value}, @var{c})
2110A C expression that defines the optional machine-dependent constraint
04afd9d6 2111letters (@samp{Q}, @samp{R}, @samp{S}, @samp{T}, @samp{U}) that can
e119b68c
MM
2112be used to segregate specific types of operands, usually memory
2113references, for the target machine. Normally this macro will not be
2114defined. If it is required for a particular target machine, it should
2115return 1 if @var{value} corresponds to the operand type represented by
2116the constraint letter @var{c}. If @var{c} is not defined as an extra
2117constraint, the value returned should be 0 regardless of @var{value}.
feca2ed3
JW
2118
2119For example, on the ROMP, load instructions cannot have their output in r0 if
2120the memory reference contains a symbolic address. Constraint letter
2121@samp{Q} is defined as representing a memory address that does
2122@emph{not} contain a symbolic address. An alternative is specified with
2123a @samp{Q} constraint on the input and @samp{r} on the output. The next
2124alternative specifies @samp{m} on the input and a register class that
2125does not include r0 on the output.
2126@end table
2127
2128@node Stack and Calling
2129@section Stack Layout and Calling Conventions
2130@cindex calling conventions
2131
2132@c prevent bad page break with this line
2133This describes the stack layout and calling conventions.
2134
2135@menu
2136* Frame Layout::
861bb6c1 2137* Stack Checking::
feca2ed3
JW
2138* Frame Registers::
2139* Elimination::
2140* Stack Arguments::
2141* Register Arguments::
2142* Scalar Return::
2143* Aggregate Return::
2144* Caller Saves::
2145* Function Entry::
2146* Profiling::
2147@end menu
2148
2149@node Frame Layout
2150@subsection Basic Stack Layout
2151@cindex stack frame layout
2152@cindex frame layout
2153
2154@c prevent bad page break with this line
2155Here is the basic stack layout.
2156
2157@table @code
2158@findex STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
2159@item STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
2160Define this macro if pushing a word onto the stack moves the stack
2161pointer to a smaller address.
2162
2163When we say, ``define this macro if @dots{},'' it means that the
2164compiler checks this macro only with @code{#ifdef} so the precise
2165definition used does not matter.
2166
2167@findex FRAME_GROWS_DOWNWARD
2168@item FRAME_GROWS_DOWNWARD
2169Define this macro if the addresses of local variable slots are at negative
2170offsets from the frame pointer.
2171
2172@findex ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD
2173@item ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD
2174Define this macro if successive arguments to a function occupy decreasing
2175addresses on the stack.
2176
2177@findex STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET
2178@item STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET
2179Offset from the frame pointer to the first local variable slot to be allocated.
2180
2181If @code{FRAME_GROWS_DOWNWARD}, find the next slot's offset by
2182subtracting the first slot's length from @code{STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET}.
2183Otherwise, it is found by adding the length of the first slot to the
2184value @code{STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET}.
2185@c i'm not sure if the above is still correct.. had to change it to get
2186@c rid of an overfull. --mew 2feb93
2187
2188@findex STACK_POINTER_OFFSET
2189@item STACK_POINTER_OFFSET
2190Offset from the stack pointer register to the first location at which
2191outgoing arguments are placed. If not specified, the default value of
2192zero is used. This is the proper value for most machines.
2193
2194If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, this is the offset to the location above
2195the first location at which outgoing arguments are placed.
2196
2197@findex FIRST_PARM_OFFSET
2198@item FIRST_PARM_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2199Offset from the argument pointer register to the first argument's
2200address. On some machines it may depend on the data type of the
2201function.
2202
2203If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, this is the offset to the location above
2204the first argument's address.
2205
2206@findex STACK_DYNAMIC_OFFSET
2207@item STACK_DYNAMIC_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2208Offset from the stack pointer register to an item dynamically allocated
2209on the stack, e.g., by @code{alloca}.
2210
2211The default value for this macro is @code{STACK_POINTER_OFFSET} plus the
2212length of the outgoing arguments. The default is correct for most
2213machines. See @file{function.c} for details.
2214
2215@findex DYNAMIC_CHAIN_ADDRESS
2216@item DYNAMIC_CHAIN_ADDRESS (@var{frameaddr})
2217A C expression whose value is RTL representing the address in a stack
2218frame where the pointer to the caller's frame is stored. Assume that
2219@var{frameaddr} is an RTL expression for the address of the stack frame
2220itself.
2221
2222If you don't define this macro, the default is to return the value
2223of @var{frameaddr}---that is, the stack frame address is also the
2224address of the stack word that points to the previous frame.
2225
2226@findex SETUP_FRAME_ADDRESSES
0bc02db4 2227@item SETUP_FRAME_ADDRESSES
feca2ed3
JW
2228If defined, a C expression that produces the machine-specific code to
2229setup the stack so that arbitrary frames can be accessed. For example,
2230on the Sparc, we must flush all of the register windows to the stack
0bc02db4
MS
2231before we can access arbitrary stack frames. You will seldom need to
2232define this macro.
2233
2234@findex BUILTIN_SETJMP_FRAME_VALUE
2235@item BUILTIN_SETJMP_FRAME_VALUE
2236If defined, a C expression that contains an rtx that is used to store
2237the address of the current frame into the built in @code{setjmp} buffer.
2238The default value, @code{virtual_stack_vars_rtx}, is correct for most
2239machines. One reason you may need to define this macro is if
2240@code{hard_frame_pointer_rtx} is the appropriate value on your machine.
feca2ed3
JW
2241
2242@findex RETURN_ADDR_RTX
2243@item RETURN_ADDR_RTX (@var{count}, @var{frameaddr})
2244A C expression whose value is RTL representing the value of the return
861bb6c1
JL
2245address for the frame @var{count} steps up from the current frame, after
2246the prologue. @var{frameaddr} is the frame pointer of the @var{count}
2247frame, or the frame pointer of the @var{count} @minus{} 1 frame if
feca2ed3
JW
2248@code{RETURN_ADDR_IN_PREVIOUS_FRAME} is defined.
2249
e9a25f70
JL
2250The value of the expression must always be the correct address when
2251@var{count} is zero, but may be @code{NULL_RTX} if there is not way to
2252determine the return address of other frames.
2253
feca2ed3
JW
2254@findex RETURN_ADDR_IN_PREVIOUS_FRAME
2255@item RETURN_ADDR_IN_PREVIOUS_FRAME
2256Define this if the return address of a particular stack frame is accessed
2257from the frame pointer of the previous stack frame.
861bb6c1
JL
2258
2259@findex INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX
2260@item INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX
2261A C expression whose value is RTL representing the location of the
2262incoming return address at the beginning of any function, before the
2263prologue. This RTL is either a @code{REG}, indicating that the return
2264value is saved in @samp{REG}, or a @code{MEM} representing a location in
2265the stack.
2266
2267You only need to define this macro if you want to support call frame
2268debugging information like that provided by DWARF 2.
2269
2270@findex INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET
2271@item INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET
2272A C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset, in bytes,
2273from the value of the stack pointer register to the top of the stack
2274frame at the beginning of any function, before the prologue. The top of
2275the frame is defined to be the value of the stack pointer in the
2276previous frame, just before the call instruction.
2277
2278You only need to define this macro if you want to support call frame
2279debugging information like that provided by DWARF 2.
2280@end table
2281
2282@node Stack Checking
2283@subsection Specifying How Stack Checking is Done
2284
2285GNU CC will check that stack references are within the boundaries of
2286the stack, if the @samp{-fstack-check} is specified, in one of three ways:
2287
2288@enumerate
2289@item
2290If the value of the @code{STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN} macro is nonzero, GNU CC
2291will assume that you have arranged for stack checking to be done at
2292appropriate places in the configuration files, e.g., in
2293@code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE}. GNU CC will do not other special processing.
2294
2295@item
2296If @code{STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN} is zero and you defined a named pattern
2297called @code{check_stack} in your @file{md} file, GNU CC will call that
2298pattern with one argument which is the address to compare the stack
2299value against. You must arrange for this pattern to report an error if
2300the stack pointer is out of range.
2301
2302@item
2303If neither of the above are true, GNU CC will generate code to periodically
2304``probe'' the stack pointer using the values of the macros defined below.
2305@end enumerate
2306
2307Normally, you will use the default values of these macros, so GNU CC
2308will use the third approach.
2309
2310@table @code
2311@findex STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN
2312@item STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN
2313A nonzero value if stack checking is done by the configuration files in a
2314machine-dependent manner. You should define this macro if stack checking
2315is require by the ABI of your machine or if you would like to have to stack
2316checking in some more efficient way than GNU CC's portable approach.
2317The default value of this macro is zero.
2318
2319@findex STACK_CHECK_PROBE_INTERVAL
2320@item STACK_CHECK_PROBE_INTERVAL
2321An integer representing the interval at which GNU CC must generate stack
2322probe instructions. You will normally define this macro to be no larger
2323than the size of the ``guard pages'' at the end of a stack area. The
2324default value of 4096 is suitable for most systems.
2325
2326@findex STACK_CHECK_PROBE_LOAD
2327@item STACK_CHECK_PROBE_LOAD
2328A integer which is nonzero if GNU CC should perform the stack probe
2329as a load instruction and zero if GNU CC should use a store instruction.
2330The default is zero, which is the most efficient choice on most systems.
2331
2332@findex STACK_CHECK_PROTECT
2333@item STACK_CHECK_PROTECT
2334The number of bytes of stack needed to recover from a stack overflow,
2335for languages where such a recovery is supported. The default value of
233675 words should be adequate for most machines.
2337
2338@findex STACK_CHECK_MAX_FRAME_SIZE
2339@item STACK_CHECK_MAX_FRAME_SIZE
2340The maximum size of a stack frame, in bytes. GNU CC will generate probe
2341instructions in non-leaf functions to ensure at least this many bytes of
2342stack are available. If a stack frame is larger than this size, stack
2343checking will not be reliable and GNU CC will issue a warning. The
2344default is chosen so that GNU CC only generates one instruction on most
2345systems. You should normally not change the default value of this macro.
2346
2347@findex STACK_CHECK_FIXED_FRAME_SIZE
2348@item STACK_CHECK_FIXED_FRAME_SIZE
2349GNU CC uses this value to generate the above warning message. It
2350represents the amount of fixed frame used by a function, not including
2351space for any callee-saved registers, temporaries and user variables.
2352You need only specify an upper bound for this amount and will normally
2353use the default of four words.
2354
2355@findex STACK_CHECK_MAX_VAR_SIZE
2356@item STACK_CHECK_MAX_VAR_SIZE
2357The maximum size, in bytes, of an object that GNU CC will place in the
2358fixed area of the stack frame when the user specifies
2359@samp{-fstack-check}.
2360GNU CC computed the default from the values of the above macros and you will
2361normally not need to override that default.
feca2ed3
JW
2362@end table
2363
2364@need 2000
2365@node Frame Registers
2366@subsection Registers That Address the Stack Frame
2367
2368@c prevent bad page break with this line
2369This discusses registers that address the stack frame.
2370
2371@table @code
2372@findex STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
2373@item STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
2374The register number of the stack pointer register, which must also be a
2375fixed register according to @code{FIXED_REGISTERS}. On most machines,
2376the hardware determines which register this is.
2377
2378@findex FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
2379@item FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
2380The register number of the frame pointer register, which is used to
2381access automatic variables in the stack frame. On some machines, the
2382hardware determines which register this is. On other machines, you can
2383choose any register you wish for this purpose.
2384
2385@findex HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
2386@item HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
2387On some machines the offset between the frame pointer and starting
2388offset of the automatic variables is not known until after register
2389allocation has been done (for example, because the saved registers are
2390between these two locations). On those machines, define
2391@code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} the number of a special, fixed register to
2392be used internally until the offset is known, and define
556e0f21 2393@code{HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} to be the actual hard register number
feca2ed3
JW
2394used for the frame pointer.
2395
2396You should define this macro only in the very rare circumstances when it
2397is not possible to calculate the offset between the frame pointer and
2398the automatic variables until after register allocation has been
2399completed. When this macro is defined, you must also indicate in your
2400definition of @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} how to eliminate
2401@code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} into either @code{HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM}
2402or @code{STACK_POINTER_REGNUM}.
2403
2404Do not define this macro if it would be the same as
2405@code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM}.
2406
2407@findex ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
2408@item ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
2409The register number of the arg pointer register, which is used to access
2410the function's argument list. On some machines, this is the same as the
2411frame pointer register. On some machines, the hardware determines which
2412register this is. On other machines, you can choose any register you
2413wish for this purpose. If this is not the same register as the frame
2414pointer register, then you must mark it as a fixed register according to
2415@code{FIXED_REGISTERS}, or arrange to be able to eliminate it
2416(@pxref{Elimination}).
2417
2418@findex RETURN_ADDRESS_POINTER_REGNUM
2419@item RETURN_ADDRESS_POINTER_REGNUM
2420The register number of the return address pointer register, which is used to
2421access the current function's return address from the stack. On some
2422machines, the return address is not at a fixed offset from the frame
2423pointer or stack pointer or argument pointer. This register can be defined
2424to point to the return address on the stack, and then be converted by
2425@code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} into either the frame pointer or stack pointer.
2426
2427Do not define this macro unless there is no other way to get the return
2428address from the stack.
2429
2430@findex STATIC_CHAIN_REGNUM
2431@findex STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM
2432@item STATIC_CHAIN_REGNUM
2433@itemx STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM
2434Register numbers used for passing a function's static chain pointer. If
2435register windows are used, the register number as seen by the called
2436function is @code{STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM}, while the register
2437number as seen by the calling function is @code{STATIC_CHAIN_REGNUM}. If
2438these registers are the same, @code{STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM} need
2439not be defined.@refill
2440
2441The static chain register need not be a fixed register.
2442
2443If the static chain is passed in memory, these macros should not be
2444defined; instead, the next two macros should be defined.
2445
2446@findex STATIC_CHAIN
2447@findex STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING
2448@item STATIC_CHAIN
2449@itemx STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING
2450If the static chain is passed in memory, these macros provide rtx giving
2451@code{mem} expressions that denote where they are stored.
2452@code{STATIC_CHAIN} and @code{STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING} give the locations
2453as seen by the calling and called functions, respectively. Often the former
2454will be at an offset from the stack pointer and the latter at an offset from
2455the frame pointer.@refill
2456
2457@findex stack_pointer_rtx
2458@findex frame_pointer_rtx
2459@findex arg_pointer_rtx
2460The variables @code{stack_pointer_rtx}, @code{frame_pointer_rtx}, and
2461@code{arg_pointer_rtx} will have been initialized prior to the use of these
2462macros and should be used to refer to those items.
2463
2464If the static chain is passed in a register, the two previous macros should
2465be defined instead.
2466@end table
2467
2468@node Elimination
2469@subsection Eliminating Frame Pointer and Arg Pointer
2470
2471@c prevent bad page break with this line
2472This is about eliminating the frame pointer and arg pointer.
2473
2474@table @code
2475@findex FRAME_POINTER_REQUIRED
2476@item FRAME_POINTER_REQUIRED
2477A C expression which is nonzero if a function must have and use a frame
2478pointer. This expression is evaluated in the reload pass. If its value is
2479nonzero the function will have a frame pointer.
2480
2481The expression can in principle examine the current function and decide
2482according to the facts, but on most machines the constant 0 or the
2483constant 1 suffices. Use 0 when the machine allows code to be generated
2484with no frame pointer, and doing so saves some time or space. Use 1
2485when there is no possible advantage to avoiding a frame pointer.
2486
2487In certain cases, the compiler does not know how to produce valid code
2488without a frame pointer. The compiler recognizes those cases and
2489automatically gives the function a frame pointer regardless of what
2490@code{FRAME_POINTER_REQUIRED} says. You don't need to worry about
2491them.@refill
2492
2493In a function that does not require a frame pointer, the frame pointer
2494register can be allocated for ordinary usage, unless you mark it as a
2495fixed register. See @code{FIXED_REGISTERS} for more information.
2496
2497@findex INITIAL_FRAME_POINTER_OFFSET
2498@findex get_frame_size
2499@item INITIAL_FRAME_POINTER_OFFSET (@var{depth-var})
2500A C statement to store in the variable @var{depth-var} the difference
2501between the frame pointer and the stack pointer values immediately after
2502the function prologue. The value would be computed from information
2503such as the result of @code{get_frame_size ()} and the tables of
2504registers @code{regs_ever_live} and @code{call_used_regs}.
2505
2506If @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} is defined, this macro will be not be used and
2507need not be defined. Otherwise, it must be defined even if
2508@code{FRAME_POINTER_REQUIRED} is defined to always be true; in that
2509case, you may set @var{depth-var} to anything.
2510
2511@findex ELIMINABLE_REGS
2512@item ELIMINABLE_REGS
2513If defined, this macro specifies a table of register pairs used to
2514eliminate unneeded registers that point into the stack frame. If it is not
2515defined, the only elimination attempted by the compiler is to replace
2516references to the frame pointer with references to the stack pointer.
2517
2518The definition of this macro is a list of structure initializations, each
2519of which specifies an original and replacement register.
2520
2521On some machines, the position of the argument pointer is not known until
2522the compilation is completed. In such a case, a separate hard register
2523must be used for the argument pointer. This register can be eliminated by
2524replacing it with either the frame pointer or the argument pointer,
2525depending on whether or not the frame pointer has been eliminated.
2526
2527In this case, you might specify:
2528@example
2529#define ELIMINABLE_REGS \
2530@{@{ARG_POINTER_REGNUM, STACK_POINTER_REGNUM@}, \
2531 @{ARG_POINTER_REGNUM, FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM@}, \
2532 @{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM, STACK_POINTER_REGNUM@}@}
2533@end example
2534
2535Note that the elimination of the argument pointer with the stack pointer is
2536specified first since that is the preferred elimination.
2537
2538@findex CAN_ELIMINATE
2539@item CAN_ELIMINATE (@var{from-reg}, @var{to-reg})
2540A C expression that returns non-zero if the compiler is allowed to try
2541to replace register number @var{from-reg} with register number
2542@var{to-reg}. This macro need only be defined if @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS}
2543is defined, and will usually be the constant 1, since most of the cases
2544preventing register elimination are things that the compiler already
2545knows about.
2546
2547@findex INITIAL_ELIMINATION_OFFSET
2548@item INITIAL_ELIMINATION_OFFSET (@var{from-reg}, @var{to-reg}, @var{offset-var})
2549This macro is similar to @code{INITIAL_FRAME_POINTER_OFFSET}. It
2550specifies the initial difference between the specified pair of
2551registers. This macro must be defined if @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} is
2552defined.
2553
2554@findex LONGJMP_RESTORE_FROM_STACK
2555@item LONGJMP_RESTORE_FROM_STACK
2556Define this macro if the @code{longjmp} function restores registers from
2557the stack frames, rather than from those saved specifically by
2558@code{setjmp}. Certain quantities must not be kept in registers across
2559a call to @code{setjmp} on such machines.
2560@end table
2561
2562@node Stack Arguments
2563@subsection Passing Function Arguments on the Stack
2564@cindex arguments on stack
2565@cindex stack arguments
2566
2567The macros in this section control how arguments are passed
2568on the stack. See the following section for other macros that
2569control passing certain arguments in registers.
2570
2571@table @code
2572@findex PROMOTE_PROTOTYPES
2573@item PROMOTE_PROTOTYPES
2574Define this macro if an argument declared in a prototype as an
2575integral type smaller than @code{int} should actually be passed as an
2576@code{int}. In addition to avoiding errors in certain cases of
2577mismatch, it also makes for better code on certain machines.
2578
2579@findex PUSH_ROUNDING
2580@item PUSH_ROUNDING (@var{npushed})
2581A C expression that is the number of bytes actually pushed onto the
2582stack when an instruction attempts to push @var{npushed} bytes.
2583
2584If the target machine does not have a push instruction, do not define
2585this macro. That directs GNU CC to use an alternate strategy: to
2586allocate the entire argument block and then store the arguments into
2587it.
2588
2589On some machines, the definition
2590
2591@example
2592#define PUSH_ROUNDING(BYTES) (BYTES)
2593@end example
2594
2595@noindent
2596will suffice. But on other machines, instructions that appear
2597to push one byte actually push two bytes in an attempt to maintain
2598alignment. Then the definition should be
2599
2600@example
2601#define PUSH_ROUNDING(BYTES) (((BYTES) + 1) & ~1)
2602@end example
2603
2604@findex ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS
2605@findex current_function_outgoing_args_size
2606@item ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS
2607If defined, the maximum amount of space required for outgoing arguments
2608will be computed and placed into the variable
2609@code{current_function_outgoing_args_size}. No space will be pushed
2610onto the stack for each call; instead, the function prologue should
2611increase the stack frame size by this amount.
2612
2613Defining both @code{PUSH_ROUNDING} and @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS}
2614is not proper.
2615
2616@findex REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE
2617@item REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (@var{fndecl})
2618Define this macro if functions should assume that stack space has been
2619allocated for arguments even when their values are passed in
2620registers.
2621
2622The value of this macro is the size, in bytes, of the area reserved for
2623arguments passed in registers for the function represented by @var{fndecl}.
2624
2625This space can be allocated by the caller, or be a part of the
2626machine-dependent stack frame: @code{OUTGOING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} says
2627which.
2628@c above is overfull. not sure what to do. --mew 5feb93 did
2629@c something, not sure if it looks good. --mew 10feb93
2630
2631@findex MAYBE_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE
2632@findex FINAL_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE
2633@item MAYBE_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE
2634@itemx FINAL_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (@var{const_size}, @var{var_size})
2635Define these macros in addition to the one above if functions might
2636allocate stack space for arguments even when their values are passed
2637in registers. These should be used when the stack space allocated
2638for arguments in registers is not a simple constant independent of the
2639function declaration.
2640
2641The value of the first macro is the size, in bytes, of the area that
2642we should initially assume would be reserved for arguments passed in registers.
2643
2644The value of the second macro is the actual size, in bytes, of the area
2645that will be reserved for arguments passed in registers. This takes two
2646arguments: an integer representing the number of bytes of fixed sized
2647arguments on the stack, and a tree representing the number of bytes of
2648variable sized arguments on the stack.
2649
2650When these macros are defined, @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} will only be
2651called for libcall functions, the current function, or for a function
2652being called when it is known that such stack space must be allocated.
2653In each case this value can be easily computed.
2654
2655When deciding whether a called function needs such stack space, and how
2656much space to reserve, GNU CC uses these two macros instead of
2657@code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE}.
2658
2659@findex OUTGOING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE
2660@item OUTGOING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE
2661Define this if it is the responsibility of the caller to allocate the area
2662reserved for arguments passed in registers.
2663
2664If @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} is defined, this macro controls
2665whether the space for these arguments counts in the value of
2666@code{current_function_outgoing_args_size}.
2667
2668@findex STACK_PARMS_IN_REG_PARM_AREA
2669@item STACK_PARMS_IN_REG_PARM_AREA
2670Define this macro if @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} is defined, but the
2671stack parameters don't skip the area specified by it.
2672@c i changed this, makes more sens and it should have taken care of the
2673@c overfull.. not as specific, tho. --mew 5feb93
2674
2675Normally, when a parameter is not passed in registers, it is placed on the
2676stack beyond the @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} area. Defining this macro
2677suppresses this behavior and causes the parameter to be passed on the
2678stack in its natural location.
2679
2680@findex RETURN_POPS_ARGS
2681@item RETURN_POPS_ARGS (@var{fundecl}, @var{funtype}, @var{stack-size})
2682A C expression that should indicate the number of bytes of its own
2683arguments that a function pops on returning, or 0 if the
2684function pops no arguments and the caller must therefore pop them all
2685after the function returns.
2686
2687@var{fundecl} is a C variable whose value is a tree node that describes
2688the function in question. Normally it is a node of type
2689@code{FUNCTION_DECL} that describes the declaration of the function.
2690From this you can obtain the DECL_MACHINE_ATTRIBUTES of the function.
2691
2692@var{funtype} is a C variable whose value is a tree node that
2693describes the function in question. Normally it is a node of type
2694@code{FUNCTION_TYPE} that describes the data type of the function.
2695From this it is possible to obtain the data types of the value and
2696arguments (if known).
2697
861bb6c1 2698When a call to a library function is being considered, @var{fundecl}
feca2ed3
JW
2699will contain an identifier node for the library function. Thus, if
2700you need to distinguish among various library functions, you can do so
2701by their names. Note that ``library function'' in this context means
2702a function used to perform arithmetic, whose name is known specially
2703in the compiler and was not mentioned in the C code being compiled.
2704
2705@var{stack-size} is the number of bytes of arguments passed on the
2706stack. If a variable number of bytes is passed, it is zero, and
2707argument popping will always be the responsibility of the calling function.
2708
2709On the Vax, all functions always pop their arguments, so the definition
2710of this macro is @var{stack-size}. On the 68000, using the standard
2711calling convention, no functions pop their arguments, so the value of
2712the macro is always 0 in this case. But an alternative calling
2713convention is available in which functions that take a fixed number of
2714arguments pop them but other functions (such as @code{printf}) pop
2715nothing (the caller pops all). When this convention is in use,
2716@var{funtype} is examined to determine whether a function takes a fixed
2717number of arguments.
2718@end table
2719
2720@node Register Arguments
2721@subsection Passing Arguments in Registers
2722@cindex arguments in registers
2723@cindex registers arguments
2724
2725This section describes the macros which let you control how various
2726types of arguments are passed in registers or how they are arranged in
2727the stack.
2728
2729@table @code
2730@findex FUNCTION_ARG
2731@item FUNCTION_ARG (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{named})
2732A C expression that controls whether a function argument is passed
2733in a register, and which register.
2734
2735The arguments are @var{cum}, which summarizes all the previous
2736arguments; @var{mode}, the machine mode of the argument; @var{type},
2737the data type of the argument as a tree node or 0 if that is not known
2738(which happens for C support library functions); and @var{named},
2739which is 1 for an ordinary argument and 0 for nameless arguments that
2740correspond to @samp{@dots{}} in the called function's prototype.
2741
2742The value of the expression is usually either a @code{reg} RTX for the
2743hard register in which to pass the argument, or zero to pass the
2744argument on the stack.
2745
2746For machines like the Vax and 68000, where normally all arguments are
2747pushed, zero suffices as a definition.
2748
2749The value of the expression can also be a @code{parallel} RTX. This is
2750used when an argument is passed in multiple locations. The mode of the
2751of the @code{parallel} should be the mode of the entire argument. The
2752@code{parallel} holds any number of @code{expr_list} pairs; each one
2753describes where part of the argument is passed. In each @code{expr_list},
2754the first operand can be either a @code{reg} RTX for the hard register
2755in which to pass this part of the argument, or zero to pass the argument
2756on the stack. If this operand is a @code{reg}, then the mode indicates
2757how large this part of the argument is. The second operand of the
2758@code{expr_list} is a @code{const_int} which gives the offset in bytes
2759into the entire argument where this part starts.
2760
2761@cindex @file{stdarg.h} and register arguments
2762The usual way to make the ANSI library @file{stdarg.h} work on a machine
2763where some arguments are usually passed in registers, is to cause
2764nameless arguments to be passed on the stack instead. This is done
2765by making @code{FUNCTION_ARG} return 0 whenever @var{named} is 0.
2766
2767@cindex @code{MUST_PASS_IN_STACK}, and @code{FUNCTION_ARG}
2768@cindex @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE}, and @code{FUNCTION_ARG}
2769You may use the macro @code{MUST_PASS_IN_STACK (@var{mode}, @var{type})}
2770in the definition of this macro to determine if this argument is of a
2771type that must be passed in the stack. If @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE}
2772is not defined and @code{FUNCTION_ARG} returns non-zero for such an
2773argument, the compiler will abort. If @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} is
2774defined, the argument will be computed in the stack and then loaded into
2775a register.
2776
d9a4ee00
JL
2777@findex MUST_PASS_IN_STACK
2778@item MUST_PASS_IN_STACK (@var{mode}, @var{type})
2779Define as a C expression that evaluates to nonzero if we do not know how
2780to pass TYPE solely in registers. The file @file{expr.h} defines a
2781definition that is usually appropriate, refer to @file{expr.h} for additional
2782documentation.
2783
feca2ed3
JW
2784@findex FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG
2785@item FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{named})
2786Define this macro if the target machine has ``register windows'', so
2787that the register in which a function sees an arguments is not
2788necessarily the same as the one in which the caller passed the
2789argument.
2790
2791For such machines, @code{FUNCTION_ARG} computes the register in which
2792the caller passes the value, and @code{FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG} should
2793be defined in a similar fashion to tell the function being called
2794where the arguments will arrive.
2795
2796If @code{FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG} is not defined, @code{FUNCTION_ARG}
2797serves both purposes.@refill
2798
2799@findex FUNCTION_ARG_PARTIAL_NREGS
2800@item FUNCTION_ARG_PARTIAL_NREGS (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{named})
2801A C expression for the number of words, at the beginning of an
2802argument, must be put in registers. The value must be zero for
2803arguments that are passed entirely in registers or that are entirely
2804pushed on the stack.
2805
2806On some machines, certain arguments must be passed partially in
2807registers and partially in memory. On these machines, typically the
2808first @var{n} words of arguments are passed in registers, and the rest
2809on the stack. If a multi-word argument (a @code{double} or a
2810structure) crosses that boundary, its first few words must be passed
2811in registers and the rest must be pushed. This macro tells the
2812compiler when this occurs, and how many of the words should go in
2813registers.
2814
2815@code{FUNCTION_ARG} for these arguments should return the first
2816register to be used by the caller for this argument; likewise
2817@code{FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG}, for the called function.
2818
2819@findex FUNCTION_ARG_PASS_BY_REFERENCE
2820@item FUNCTION_ARG_PASS_BY_REFERENCE (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{named})
2821A C expression that indicates when an argument must be passed by reference.
2822If nonzero for an argument, a copy of that argument is made in memory and a
2823pointer to the argument is passed instead of the argument itself.
2824The pointer is passed in whatever way is appropriate for passing a pointer
2825to that type.
2826
2827On machines where @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} is not defined, a suitable
2828definition of this macro might be
2829@smallexample
2830#define FUNCTION_ARG_PASS_BY_REFERENCE\
2831(CUM, MODE, TYPE, NAMED) \
2832 MUST_PASS_IN_STACK (MODE, TYPE)
2833@end smallexample
2834@c this is *still* too long. --mew 5feb93
2835
2836@findex FUNCTION_ARG_CALLEE_COPIES
2837@item FUNCTION_ARG_CALLEE_COPIES (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{named})
2838If defined, a C expression that indicates when it is the called function's
2839responsibility to make a copy of arguments passed by invisible reference.
2840Normally, the caller makes a copy and passes the address of the copy to the
2841routine being called. When FUNCTION_ARG_CALLEE_COPIES is defined and is
2842nonzero, the caller does not make a copy. Instead, it passes a pointer to the
2843``live'' value. The called function must not modify this value. If it can be
2844determined that the value won't be modified, it need not make a copy;
2845otherwise a copy must be made.
2846
2847@findex CUMULATIVE_ARGS
2848@item CUMULATIVE_ARGS
2849A C type for declaring a variable that is used as the first argument of
2850@code{FUNCTION_ARG} and other related values. For some target machines,
2851the type @code{int} suffices and can hold the number of bytes of
2852argument so far.
2853
2854There is no need to record in @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS} anything about the
2855arguments that have been passed on the stack. The compiler has other
2856variables to keep track of that. For target machines on which all
2857arguments are passed on the stack, there is no need to store anything in
2858@code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS}; however, the data structure must exist and
2859should not be empty, so use @code{int}.
2860
2861@findex INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS
2862@item INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS (@var{cum}, @var{fntype}, @var{libname}, @var{indirect})
2863A C statement (sans semicolon) for initializing the variable @var{cum}
2864for the state at the beginning of the argument list. The variable has
2865type @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS}. The value of @var{fntype} is the tree node
2866for the data type of the function which will receive the args, or 0
2867if the args are to a compiler support library function. The value of
2868@var{indirect} is nonzero when processing an indirect call, for example
2869a call through a function pointer. The value of @var{indirect} is zero
2870for a call to an explicitly named function, a library function call, or when
2871@code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} is used to find arguments for the function
2872being compiled.
2873
2874When processing a call to a compiler support library function,
2875@var{libname} identifies which one. It is a @code{symbol_ref} rtx which
2876contains the name of the function, as a string. @var{libname} is 0 when
2877an ordinary C function call is being processed. Thus, each time this
2878macro is called, either @var{libname} or @var{fntype} is nonzero, but
2879never both of them at once.
2880
2881@findex INIT_CUMULATIVE_INCOMING_ARGS
2882@item INIT_CUMULATIVE_INCOMING_ARGS (@var{cum}, @var{fntype}, @var{libname})
2883Like @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} but overrides it for the purposes of
2884finding the arguments for the function being compiled. If this macro is
2885undefined, @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} is used instead.
2886
2887The value passed for @var{libname} is always 0, since library routines
2888with special calling conventions are never compiled with GNU CC. The
2889argument @var{libname} exists for symmetry with
2890@code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS}.
2891@c could use "this macro" in place of @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS}, maybe.
2892@c --mew 5feb93 i switched the order of the sentences. --mew 10feb93
2893
2894@findex FUNCTION_ARG_ADVANCE
2895@item FUNCTION_ARG_ADVANCE (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{named})
2896A C statement (sans semicolon) to update the summarizer variable
2897@var{cum} to advance past an argument in the argument list. The
2898values @var{mode}, @var{type} and @var{named} describe that argument.
2899Once this is done, the variable @var{cum} is suitable for analyzing
2900the @emph{following} argument with @code{FUNCTION_ARG}, etc.@refill
2901
2902This macro need not do anything if the argument in question was passed
2903on the stack. The compiler knows how to track the amount of stack space
2904used for arguments without any special help.
2905
2906@findex FUNCTION_ARG_PADDING
2907@item FUNCTION_ARG_PADDING (@var{mode}, @var{type})
2908If defined, a C expression which determines whether, and in which direction,
2909to pad out an argument with extra space. The value should be of type
2910@code{enum direction}: either @code{upward} to pad above the argument,
2911@code{downward} to pad below, or @code{none} to inhibit padding.
2912
2913The @emph{amount} of padding is always just enough to reach the next
2914multiple of @code{FUNCTION_ARG_BOUNDARY}; this macro does not control
2915it.
2916
2917This macro has a default definition which is right for most systems.
2918For little-endian machines, the default is to pad upward. For
2919big-endian machines, the default is to pad downward for an argument of
2920constant size shorter than an @code{int}, and upward otherwise.
2921
2922@findex FUNCTION_ARG_BOUNDARY
2923@item FUNCTION_ARG_BOUNDARY (@var{mode}, @var{type})
2924If defined, a C expression that gives the alignment boundary, in bits,
2925of an argument with the specified mode and type. If it is not defined,
2926@code{PARM_BOUNDARY} is used for all arguments.
2927
2928@findex FUNCTION_ARG_REGNO_P
2929@item FUNCTION_ARG_REGNO_P (@var{regno})
2930A C expression that is nonzero if @var{regno} is the number of a hard
2931register in which function arguments are sometimes passed. This does
2932@emph{not} include implicit arguments such as the static chain and
2933the structure-value address. On many machines, no registers can be
2934used for this purpose since all function arguments are pushed on the
2935stack.
bb1b857a
GK
2936
2937@findex LOAD_ARGS_REVERSED
2938@item LOAD_ARGS_REVERSED
2939If defined, the order in which arguments are loaded into their
2940respective argument registers is reversed so that the last
2941argument is loaded first. This macro only effects arguments
2942passed in registers.
2943
feca2ed3
JW
2944@end table
2945
2946@node Scalar Return
2947@subsection How Scalar Function Values Are Returned
2948@cindex return values in registers
2949@cindex values, returned by functions
2950@cindex scalars, returned as values
2951
2952This section discusses the macros that control returning scalars as
2953values---values that can fit in registers.
2954
2955@table @code
2956@findex TRADITIONAL_RETURN_FLOAT
2957@item TRADITIONAL_RETURN_FLOAT
2958Define this macro if @samp{-traditional} should not cause functions
2959declared to return @code{float} to convert the value to @code{double}.
2960
2961@findex FUNCTION_VALUE
2962@item FUNCTION_VALUE (@var{valtype}, @var{func})
2963A C expression to create an RTX representing the place where a
2964function returns a value of data type @var{valtype}. @var{valtype} is
2965a tree node representing a data type. Write @code{TYPE_MODE
2966(@var{valtype})} to get the machine mode used to represent that type.
2967On many machines, only the mode is relevant. (Actually, on most
2968machines, scalar values are returned in the same place regardless of
2969mode).@refill
2970
2971The value of the expression is usually a @code{reg} RTX for the hard
2972register where the return value is stored. The value can also be a
2973@code{parallel} RTX, if the return value is in multiple places. See
2974@code{FUNCTION_ARG} for an explanation of the @code{parallel} form.
2975
2976If @code{PROMOTE_FUNCTION_RETURN} is defined, you must apply the same
2977promotion rules specified in @code{PROMOTE_MODE} if @var{valtype} is a
2978scalar type.
2979
2980If the precise function being called is known, @var{func} is a tree
2981node (@code{FUNCTION_DECL}) for it; otherwise, @var{func} is a null
2982pointer. This makes it possible to use a different value-returning
2983convention for specific functions when all their calls are
2984known.@refill
2985
2986@code{FUNCTION_VALUE} is not used for return vales with aggregate data
2987types, because these are returned in another way. See
2988@code{STRUCT_VALUE_REGNUM} and related macros, below.
2989
2990@findex FUNCTION_OUTGOING_VALUE
2991@item FUNCTION_OUTGOING_VALUE (@var{valtype}, @var{func})
2992Define this macro if the target machine has ``register windows''
2993so that the register in which a function returns its value is not
2994the same as the one in which the caller sees the value.
2995
2996For such machines, @code{FUNCTION_VALUE} computes the register in which
2997the caller will see the value. @code{FUNCTION_OUTGOING_VALUE} should be
2998defined in a similar fashion to tell the function where to put the
2999value.@refill
3000
3001If @code{FUNCTION_OUTGOING_VALUE} is not defined,
3002@code{FUNCTION_VALUE} serves both purposes.@refill
3003
3004@code{FUNCTION_OUTGOING_VALUE} is not used for return vales with
3005aggregate data types, because these are returned in another way. See
3006@code{STRUCT_VALUE_REGNUM} and related macros, below.
3007
3008@findex LIBCALL_VALUE
3009@item LIBCALL_VALUE (@var{mode})
3010A C expression to create an RTX representing the place where a library
3011function returns a value of mode @var{mode}. If the precise function
3012being called is known, @var{func} is a tree node
3013(@code{FUNCTION_DECL}) for it; otherwise, @var{func} is a null
3014pointer. This makes it possible to use a different value-returning
3015convention for specific functions when all their calls are
3016known.@refill
3017
3018Note that ``library function'' in this context means a compiler
3019support routine, used to perform arithmetic, whose name is known
3020specially by the compiler and was not mentioned in the C code being
3021compiled.
3022
3023The definition of @code{LIBRARY_VALUE} need not be concerned aggregate
3024data types, because none of the library functions returns such types.
3025
3026@findex FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P
3027@item FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P (@var{regno})
3028A C expression that is nonzero if @var{regno} is the number of a hard
3029register in which the values of called function may come back.
3030
3031A register whose use for returning values is limited to serving as the
3032second of a pair (for a value of type @code{double}, say) need not be
3033recognized by this macro. So for most machines, this definition
3034suffices:
3035
3036@example
3037#define FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P(N) ((N) == 0)
3038@end example
3039
3040If the machine has register windows, so that the caller and the called
3041function use different registers for the return value, this macro
3042should recognize only the caller's register numbers.
3043
3044@findex APPLY_RESULT_SIZE
3045@item APPLY_RESULT_SIZE
3046Define this macro if @samp{untyped_call} and @samp{untyped_return}
3047need more space than is implied by @code{FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P} for
3048saving and restoring an arbitrary return value.
3049@end table
3050
3051@node Aggregate Return
3052@subsection How Large Values Are Returned
3053@cindex aggregates as return values
3054@cindex large return values
3055@cindex returning aggregate values
3056@cindex structure value address
3057
3058When a function value's mode is @code{BLKmode} (and in some other
3059cases), the value is not returned according to @code{FUNCTION_VALUE}
3060(@pxref{Scalar Return}). Instead, the caller passes the address of a
3061block of memory in which the value should be stored. This address
3062is called the @dfn{structure value address}.
3063
3064This section describes how to control returning structure values in
3065memory.
3066
3067@table @code
3068@findex RETURN_IN_MEMORY
3069@item RETURN_IN_MEMORY (@var{type})
3070A C expression which can inhibit the returning of certain function
3071values in registers, based on the type of value. A nonzero value says
3072to return the function value in memory, just as large structures are
3073always returned. Here @var{type} will be a C expression of type
3074@code{tree}, representing the data type of the value.
3075
3076Note that values of mode @code{BLKmode} must be explicitly handled
3077by this macro. Also, the option @samp{-fpcc-struct-return}
3078takes effect regardless of this macro. On most systems, it is
3079possible to leave the macro undefined; this causes a default
3080definition to be used, whose value is the constant 1 for @code{BLKmode}
3081values, and 0 otherwise.
3082
3083Do not use this macro to indicate that structures and unions should always
3084be returned in memory. You should instead use @code{DEFAULT_PCC_STRUCT_RETURN}
3085to indicate this.
3086
3087@findex DEFAULT_PCC_STRUCT_RETURN
3088@item DEFAULT_PCC_STRUCT_RETURN
3089Define this macro to be 1 if all structure and union return values must be
3090in memory. Since this results in slower code, this should be defined
3091only if needed for compatibility with other compilers or with an ABI.
3092If you define this macro to be 0, then the conventions used for structure
3093and union return values are decided by the @code{RETURN_IN_MEMORY} macro.
3094
3095If not defined, this defaults to the value 1.
3096
3097@findex STRUCT_VALUE_REGNUM
3098@item STRUCT_VALUE_REGNUM
3099If the structure value address is passed in a register, then
3100@code{STRUCT_VALUE_REGNUM} should be the number of that register.
3101
3102@findex STRUCT_VALUE
3103@item STRUCT_VALUE
3104If the structure value address is not passed in a register, define
3105@code{STRUCT_VALUE} as an expression returning an RTX for the place
3106where the address is passed. If it returns 0, the address is passed as
3107an ``invisible'' first argument.
3108
3109@findex STRUCT_VALUE_INCOMING_REGNUM
3110@item STRUCT_VALUE_INCOMING_REGNUM
3111On some architectures the place where the structure value address
3112is found by the called function is not the same place that the
3113caller put it. This can be due to register windows, or it could
3114be because the function prologue moves it to a different place.
3115
3116If the incoming location of the structure value address is in a
3117register, define this macro as the register number.
3118
3119@findex STRUCT_VALUE_INCOMING
3120@item STRUCT_VALUE_INCOMING
3121If the incoming location is not a register, then you should define
3122@code{STRUCT_VALUE_INCOMING} as an expression for an RTX for where the
3123called function should find the value. If it should find the value on
3124the stack, define this to create a @code{mem} which refers to the frame
3125pointer. A definition of 0 means that the address is passed as an
3126``invisible'' first argument.
3127
3128@findex PCC_STATIC_STRUCT_RETURN
3129@item PCC_STATIC_STRUCT_RETURN
3130Define this macro if the usual system convention on the target machine
3131for returning structures and unions is for the called function to return
3132the address of a static variable containing the value.
3133
3134Do not define this if the usual system convention is for the caller to
3135pass an address to the subroutine.
3136
3137This macro has effect in @samp{-fpcc-struct-return} mode, but it does
3138nothing when you use @samp{-freg-struct-return} mode.
3139@end table
3140
3141@node Caller Saves
3142@subsection Caller-Saves Register Allocation
3143
3144If you enable it, GNU CC can save registers around function calls. This
3145makes it possible to use call-clobbered registers to hold variables that
3146must live across calls.
3147
3148@table @code
3149@findex DEFAULT_CALLER_SAVES
3150@item DEFAULT_CALLER_SAVES
3151Define this macro if function calls on the target machine do not preserve
3152any registers; in other words, if @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS} has 1
81610a0d
HPN
3153for all registers. When defined, this macro enables @samp{-fcaller-saves}
3154by default for all optimization levels. It has no effect for optimization
3155levels 2 and higher, where @samp{-fcaller-saves} is the default.
feca2ed3
JW
3156
3157@findex CALLER_SAVE_PROFITABLE
3158@item CALLER_SAVE_PROFITABLE (@var{refs}, @var{calls})
3159A C expression to determine whether it is worthwhile to consider placing
3160a pseudo-register in a call-clobbered hard register and saving and
3161restoring it around each function call. The expression should be 1 when
3162this is worth doing, and 0 otherwise.
3163
3164If you don't define this macro, a default is used which is good on most
3165machines: @code{4 * @var{calls} < @var{refs}}.
3166@end table
3167
3168@node Function Entry
3169@subsection Function Entry and Exit
3170@cindex function entry and exit
3171@cindex prologue
3172@cindex epilogue
3173
3174This section describes the macros that output function entry
3175(@dfn{prologue}) and exit (@dfn{epilogue}) code.
3176
3177@table @code
3178@findex FUNCTION_PROLOGUE
3179@item FUNCTION_PROLOGUE (@var{file}, @var{size})
3180A C compound statement that outputs the assembler code for entry to a
3181function. The prologue is responsible for setting up the stack frame,
3182initializing the frame pointer register, saving registers that must be
3183saved, and allocating @var{size} additional bytes of storage for the
3184local variables. @var{size} is an integer. @var{file} is a stdio
3185stream to which the assembler code should be output.
3186
3187The label for the beginning of the function need not be output by this
3188macro. That has already been done when the macro is run.
3189
3190@findex regs_ever_live
3191To determine which registers to save, the macro can refer to the array
3192@code{regs_ever_live}: element @var{r} is nonzero if hard register
3193@var{r} is used anywhere within the function. This implies the function
3194prologue should save register @var{r}, provided it is not one of the
3195call-used registers. (@code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} must likewise use
3196@code{regs_ever_live}.)
3197
3198On machines that have ``register windows'', the function entry code does
3199not save on the stack the registers that are in the windows, even if
3200they are supposed to be preserved by function calls; instead it takes
3201appropriate steps to ``push'' the register stack, if any non-call-used
3202registers are used in the function.
3203
3204@findex frame_pointer_needed
3205On machines where functions may or may not have frame-pointers, the
3206function entry code must vary accordingly; it must set up the frame
3207pointer if one is wanted, and not otherwise. To determine whether a
3208frame pointer is in wanted, the macro can refer to the variable
3209@code{frame_pointer_needed}. The variable's value will be 1 at run
3210time in a function that needs a frame pointer. @xref{Elimination}.
3211
3212The function entry code is responsible for allocating any stack space
3213required for the function. This stack space consists of the regions
3214listed below. In most cases, these regions are allocated in the
3215order listed, with the last listed region closest to the top of the
3216stack (the lowest address if @code{STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD} is defined, and
3217the highest address if it is not defined). You can use a different order
3218for a machine if doing so is more convenient or required for
3219compatibility reasons. Except in cases where required by standard
3220or by a debugger, there is no reason why the stack layout used by GCC
3221need agree with that used by other compilers for a machine.
3222
3223@itemize @bullet
3224@item
3225@findex current_function_pretend_args_size
3226A region of @code{current_function_pretend_args_size} bytes of
3227uninitialized space just underneath the first argument arriving on the
3228stack. (This may not be at the very start of the allocated stack region
3229if the calling sequence has pushed anything else since pushing the stack
3230arguments. But usually, on such machines, nothing else has been pushed
3231yet, because the function prologue itself does all the pushing.) This
3232region is used on machines where an argument may be passed partly in
3233registers and partly in memory, and, in some cases to support the
3234features in @file{varargs.h} and @file{stdargs.h}.
3235
3236@item
3237An area of memory used to save certain registers used by the function.
3238The size of this area, which may also include space for such things as
3239the return address and pointers to previous stack frames, is
3240machine-specific and usually depends on which registers have been used
3241in the function. Machines with register windows often do not require
3242a save area.
3243
3244@item
3245A region of at least @var{size} bytes, possibly rounded up to an allocation
3246boundary, to contain the local variables of the function. On some machines,
3247this region and the save area may occur in the opposite order, with the
3248save area closer to the top of the stack.
3249
3250@item
3251@cindex @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} and stack frames
3252Optionally, when @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} is defined, a region of
3253@code{current_function_outgoing_args_size} bytes to be used for outgoing
3254argument lists of the function. @xref{Stack Arguments}.
3255@end itemize
3256
3257Normally, it is necessary for the macros @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and
3258@code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} to treat leaf functions specially. The C
3259variable @code{leaf_function} is nonzero for such a function.
3260
3261@findex EXIT_IGNORE_STACK
3262@item EXIT_IGNORE_STACK
3263Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if the return
3264instruction or the function epilogue ignores the value of the stack
3265pointer; in other words, if it is safe to delete an instruction to
3266adjust the stack pointer before a return from the function.
3267
3268Note that this macro's value is relevant only for functions for which
3269frame pointers are maintained. It is never safe to delete a final
3270stack adjustment in a function that has no frame pointer, and the
3271compiler knows this regardless of @code{EXIT_IGNORE_STACK}.
3272
3273@findex EPILOGUE_USES
3274@item EPILOGUE_USES (@var{regno})
3275Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero for registers are
3276used by the epilogue or the @samp{return} pattern. The stack and frame
3277pointer registers are already be assumed to be used as needed.
3278
3279@findex FUNCTION_EPILOGUE
3280@item FUNCTION_EPILOGUE (@var{file}, @var{size})
3281A C compound statement that outputs the assembler code for exit from a
3282function. The epilogue is responsible for restoring the saved
3283registers and stack pointer to their values when the function was
3284called, and returning control to the caller. This macro takes the
3285same arguments as the macro @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE}, and the
3286registers to restore are determined from @code{regs_ever_live} and
3287@code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS} in the same way.
3288
3289On some machines, there is a single instruction that does all the work
3290of returning from the function. On these machines, give that
3291instruction the name @samp{return} and do not define the macro
3292@code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} at all.
3293
3294Do not define a pattern named @samp{return} if you want the
3295@code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} to be used. If you want the target switches
3296to control whether return instructions or epilogues are used, define a
3297@samp{return} pattern with a validity condition that tests the target
3298switches appropriately. If the @samp{return} pattern's validity
3299condition is false, epilogues will be used.
3300
3301On machines where functions may or may not have frame-pointers, the
3302function exit code must vary accordingly. Sometimes the code for these
3303two cases is completely different. To determine whether a frame pointer
3304is wanted, the macro can refer to the variable
3305@code{frame_pointer_needed}. The variable's value will be 1 when compiling
3306a function that needs a frame pointer.
3307
3308Normally, @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} must
3309treat leaf functions specially. The C variable @code{leaf_function} is
3310nonzero for such a function. @xref{Leaf Functions}.
3311
3312On some machines, some functions pop their arguments on exit while
3313others leave that for the caller to do. For example, the 68020 when
3314given @samp{-mrtd} pops arguments in functions that take a fixed
3315number of arguments.
3316
3317@findex current_function_pops_args
3318Your definition of the macro @code{RETURN_POPS_ARGS} decides which
3319functions pop their own arguments. @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} needs to
3320know what was decided. The variable that is called
3321@code{current_function_pops_args} is the number of bytes of its
3322arguments that a function should pop. @xref{Scalar Return}.
3323@c what is the "its arguments" in the above sentence referring to, pray
3324@c tell? --mew 5feb93
3325
3326@findex DELAY_SLOTS_FOR_EPILOGUE
3327@item DELAY_SLOTS_FOR_EPILOGUE
3328Define this macro if the function epilogue contains delay slots to which
3329instructions from the rest of the function can be ``moved''. The
3330definition should be a C expression whose value is an integer
3331representing the number of delay slots there.
3332
3333@findex ELIGIBLE_FOR_EPILOGUE_DELAY
3334@item ELIGIBLE_FOR_EPILOGUE_DELAY (@var{insn}, @var{n})
3335A C expression that returns 1 if @var{insn} can be placed in delay
3336slot number @var{n} of the epilogue.
3337
3338The argument @var{n} is an integer which identifies the delay slot now
3339being considered (since different slots may have different rules of
3340eligibility). It is never negative and is always less than the number
3341of epilogue delay slots (what @code{DELAY_SLOTS_FOR_EPILOGUE} returns).
3342If you reject a particular insn for a given delay slot, in principle, it
3343may be reconsidered for a subsequent delay slot. Also, other insns may
3344(at least in principle) be considered for the so far unfilled delay
3345slot.
3346
3347@findex current_function_epilogue_delay_list
3348@findex final_scan_insn
3349The insns accepted to fill the epilogue delay slots are put in an RTL
3350list made with @code{insn_list} objects, stored in the variable
3351@code{current_function_epilogue_delay_list}. The insn for the first
3352delay slot comes first in the list. Your definition of the macro
3353@code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} should fill the delay slots by outputting the
3354insns in this list, usually by calling @code{final_scan_insn}.
3355
3356You need not define this macro if you did not define
3357@code{DELAY_SLOTS_FOR_EPILOGUE}.
3358
3359@findex ASM_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK
3360@item ASM_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK (@var{file}, @var{thunk_fndecl}, @var{delta}, @var{function})
3361A C compound statement that outputs the assembler code for a thunk
3362function, used to implement C++ virtual function calls with multiple
3363inheritance. The thunk acts as a wrapper around a virtual function,
3364adjusting the implicit object parameter before handing control off to
3365the real function.
3366
3367First, emit code to add the integer @var{delta} to the location that
3368contains the incoming first argument. Assume that this argument
3369contains a pointer, and is the one used to pass the @code{this} pointer
3370in C++. This is the incoming argument @emph{before} the function prologue,
3371e.g. @samp{%o0} on a sparc. The addition must preserve the values of
3372all other incoming arguments.
3373
3374After the addition, emit code to jump to @var{function}, which is a
3375@code{FUNCTION_DECL}. This is a direct pure jump, not a call, and does
3376not touch the return address. Hence returning from @var{FUNCTION} will
3377return to whoever called the current @samp{thunk}.
3378
3379The effect must be as if @var{function} had been called directly with
3380the adjusted first argument. This macro is responsible for emitting all
3381of the code for a thunk function; @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and
3382@code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} are not invoked.
3383
3384The @var{thunk_fndecl} is redundant. (@var{delta} and @var{function}
3385have already been extracted from it.) It might possibly be useful on
3386some targets, but probably not.
3387
861bb6c1
JL
3388If you do not define this macro, the target-independent code in the C++
3389frontend will generate a less efficient heavyweight thunk that calls
3390@var{function} instead of jumping to it. The generic approach does
3391not support varargs.
feca2ed3
JW
3392@end table
3393
3394@node Profiling
3395@subsection Generating Code for Profiling
3396@cindex profiling, code generation
3397
3398These macros will help you generate code for profiling.
3399
3400@table @code
3401@findex FUNCTION_PROFILER
3402@item FUNCTION_PROFILER (@var{file}, @var{labelno})
3403A C statement or compound statement to output to @var{file} some
3404assembler code to call the profiling subroutine @code{mcount}.
3405Before calling, the assembler code must load the address of a
3406counter variable into a register where @code{mcount} expects to
3407find the address. The name of this variable is @samp{LP} followed
3408by the number @var{labelno}, so you would generate the name using
3409@samp{LP%d} in a @code{fprintf}.
3410
3411@findex mcount
3412The details of how the address should be passed to @code{mcount} are
3413determined by your operating system environment, not by GNU CC. To
3414figure them out, compile a small program for profiling using the
3415system's installed C compiler and look at the assembler code that
3416results.
3417
3418@findex PROFILE_BEFORE_PROLOGUE
3419@item PROFILE_BEFORE_PROLOGUE
3420Define this macro if the code for function profiling should come before
3421the function prologue. Normally, the profiling code comes after.
3422
3423@findex FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER
3424@vindex profile_block_flag
3425@item FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER (@var{file}, @var{labelno})
3426A C statement or compound statement to output to @var{file} some
3427assembler code to initialize basic-block profiling for the current
3428object module. The global compile flag @code{profile_block_flag}
956d6950 3429distinguishes two profile modes.
feca2ed3
JW
3430
3431@table @code
3432@findex __bb_init_func
3433@item profile_block_flag != 2
3434Output code to call the subroutine @code{__bb_init_func} once per
3435object module, passing it as its sole argument the address of a block
3436allocated in the object module.
3437
3438The name of the block is a local symbol made with this statement:
3439
3440@smallexample
3441ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{buffer}, "LPBX", 0);
3442@end smallexample
3443
3444Of course, since you are writing the definition of
3445@code{ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL} as well as that of this macro, you
3446can take a short cut in the definition of this macro and use the name
3447that you know will result.
3448
3449The first word of this block is a flag which will be nonzero if the
3450object module has already been initialized. So test this word first,
3451and do not call @code{__bb_init_func} if the flag is
3452nonzero. BLOCK_OR_LABEL contains a unique number which may be used to
3453generate a label as a branch destination when @code{__bb_init_func}
3454will not be called.
3455
3456Described in assembler language, the code to be output looks like:
3457
3458@example
3459 cmp (LPBX0),0
3460 bne local_label
3461 parameter1 <- LPBX0
3462 call __bb_init_func
3463local_label:
3464@end example
3465
3466@findex __bb_init_trace_func
3467@item profile_block_flag == 2
3468Output code to call the subroutine @code{__bb_init_trace_func}
3469and pass two parameters to it. The first parameter is the same as
3470for @code{__bb_init_func}. The second parameter is the number of the
3471first basic block of the function as given by BLOCK_OR_LABEL. Note
3472that @code{__bb_init_trace_func} has to be called, even if the object
3473module has been initialized already.
3474
3475Described in assembler language, the code to be output looks like:
3476@example
3477parameter1 <- LPBX0
3478parameter2 <- BLOCK_OR_LABEL
3479call __bb_init_trace_func
3480@end example
3481@end table
3482
3483@findex BLOCK_PROFILER
3484@vindex profile_block_flag
3485@item BLOCK_PROFILER (@var{file}, @var{blockno})
3486A C statement or compound statement to output to @var{file} some
3487assembler code to increment the count associated with the basic
3488block number @var{blockno}. The global compile flag
956d6950 3489@code{profile_block_flag} distinguishes two profile modes.
feca2ed3
JW
3490
3491@table @code
3492@item profile_block_flag != 2
3493Output code to increment the counter directly. Basic blocks are
3494numbered separately from zero within each compilation. The count
3495associated with block number @var{blockno} is at index
3496@var{blockno} in a vector of words; the name of this array is a local
3497symbol made with this statement:
3498
3499@smallexample
3500ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{buffer}, "LPBX", 2);
3501@end smallexample
3502
3503@c This paragraph is the same as one a few paragraphs up.
3504@c That is not an error.
3505Of course, since you are writing the definition of
3506@code{ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL} as well as that of this macro, you
3507can take a short cut in the definition of this macro and use the name
3508that you know will result.
3509
3510Described in assembler language, the code to be output looks like:
3511
3512@smallexample
3513inc (LPBX2+4*BLOCKNO)
3514@end smallexample
3515
3516@vindex __bb
3517@findex __bb_trace_func
3518@item profile_block_flag == 2
3519Output code to initialize the global structure @code{__bb} and
3520call the function @code{__bb_trace_func}, which will increment the
3521counter.
3522
3523@code{__bb} consists of two words. In the first word, the current
3524basic block number, as given by BLOCKNO, has to be stored. In
3525the second word, the address of a block allocated in the object
3526module has to be stored. The address is given by the label created
3527with this statement:
3528
3529@smallexample
3530ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{buffer}, "LPBX", 0);
3531@end smallexample
3532
3533Described in assembler language, the code to be output looks like:
3534@example
3535move BLOCKNO -> (__bb)
3536move LPBX0 -> (__bb+4)
3537call __bb_trace_func
3538@end example
3539@end table
3540
3541@findex FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER_EXIT
3542@findex __bb_trace_ret
3543@vindex profile_block_flag
3544@item FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER_EXIT (@var{file})
3545A C statement or compound statement to output to @var{file}
3546assembler code to call function @code{__bb_trace_ret}. The
3547assembler code should only be output
3548if the global compile flag @code{profile_block_flag} == 2. This
3549macro has to be used at every place where code for returning from
3550a function is generated (e.g. @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE}). Although
3551you have to write the definition of @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE}
3552as well, you have to define this macro to tell the compiler, that
3553the proper call to @code{__bb_trace_ret} is produced.
3554
3555@findex MACHINE_STATE_SAVE
3556@findex __bb_init_trace_func
3557@findex __bb_trace_func
3558@findex __bb_trace_ret
3559@item MACHINE_STATE_SAVE (@var{id})
3560A C statement or compound statement to save all registers, which may
3561be clobbered by a function call, including condition codes. The
3562@code{asm} statement will be mostly likely needed to handle this
3563task. Local labels in the assembler code can be concatenated with the
3564string @var{id}, to obtain a unique lable name.
3565
3566Registers or condition codes clobbered by @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} or
3567@code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} must be saved in the macros
3568@code{FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER}, @code{FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER_EXIT} and
3569@code{BLOCK_PROFILER} prior calling @code{__bb_init_trace_func},
3570@code{__bb_trace_ret} and @code{__bb_trace_func} respectively.
3571
3572@findex MACHINE_STATE_RESTORE
3573@findex __bb_init_trace_func
3574@findex __bb_trace_func
3575@findex __bb_trace_ret
3576@item MACHINE_STATE_RESTORE (@var{id})
3577A C statement or compound statement to restore all registers, including
3578condition codes, saved by @code{MACHINE_STATE_SAVE}.
3579
3580Registers or condition codes clobbered by @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} or
3581@code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} must be restored in the macros
3582@code{FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER}, @code{FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER_EXIT} and
3583@code{BLOCK_PROFILER} after calling @code{__bb_init_trace_func},
3584@code{__bb_trace_ret} and @code{__bb_trace_func} respectively.
3585
3586@findex BLOCK_PROFILER_CODE
3587@item BLOCK_PROFILER_CODE
3588A C function or functions which are needed in the library to
3589support block profiling.
3590@end table
3591
3592@node Varargs
3593@section Implementing the Varargs Macros
3594@cindex varargs implementation
3595
3596GNU CC comes with an implementation of @file{varargs.h} and
3597@file{stdarg.h} that work without change on machines that pass arguments
3598on the stack. Other machines require their own implementations of
3599varargs, and the two machine independent header files must have
3600conditionals to include it.
3601
3602ANSI @file{stdarg.h} differs from traditional @file{varargs.h} mainly in
3603the calling convention for @code{va_start}. The traditional
3604implementation takes just one argument, which is the variable in which
3605to store the argument pointer. The ANSI implementation of
3606@code{va_start} takes an additional second argument. The user is
3607supposed to write the last named argument of the function here.
3608
3609However, @code{va_start} should not use this argument. The way to find
3610the end of the named arguments is with the built-in functions described
3611below.
3612
3613@table @code
3614@findex __builtin_saveregs
3615@item __builtin_saveregs ()
3616Use this built-in function to save the argument registers in memory so
3617that the varargs mechanism can access them. Both ANSI and traditional
3618versions of @code{va_start} must use @code{__builtin_saveregs}, unless
3619you use @code{SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS} (see below) instead.
3620
3621On some machines, @code{__builtin_saveregs} is open-coded under the
3622control of the macro @code{EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS}. On other machines,
3623it calls a routine written in assembler language, found in
3624@file{libgcc2.c}.
3625
3626Code generated for the call to @code{__builtin_saveregs} appears at the
3627beginning of the function, as opposed to where the call to
3628@code{__builtin_saveregs} is written, regardless of what the code is.
3629This is because the registers must be saved before the function starts
3630to use them for its own purposes.
3631@c i rewrote the first sentence above to fix an overfull hbox. --mew
3632@c 10feb93
3633
3634@findex __builtin_args_info
3635@item __builtin_args_info (@var{category})
3636Use this built-in function to find the first anonymous arguments in
3637registers.
3638
3639In general, a machine may have several categories of registers used for
3640arguments, each for a particular category of data types. (For example,
3641on some machines, floating-point registers are used for floating-point
3642arguments while other arguments are passed in the general registers.)
3643To make non-varargs functions use the proper calling convention, you
3644have defined the @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS} data type to record how many
3645registers in each category have been used so far
3646
3647@code{__builtin_args_info} accesses the same data structure of type
3648@code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS} after the ordinary argument layout is finished
3649with it, with @var{category} specifying which word to access. Thus, the
3650value indicates the first unused register in a given category.
3651
3652Normally, you would use @code{__builtin_args_info} in the implementation
3653of @code{va_start}, accessing each category just once and storing the
3654value in the @code{va_list} object. This is because @code{va_list} will
3655have to update the values, and there is no way to alter the
3656values accessed by @code{__builtin_args_info}.
3657
3658@findex __builtin_next_arg
3659@item __builtin_next_arg (@var{lastarg})
3660This is the equivalent of @code{__builtin_args_info}, for stack
3661arguments. It returns the address of the first anonymous stack
3662argument, as type @code{void *}. If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, it
3663returns the address of the location above the first anonymous stack
3664argument. Use it in @code{va_start} to initialize the pointer for
3665fetching arguments from the stack. Also use it in @code{va_start} to
3666verify that the second parameter @var{lastarg} is the last named argument
3667of the current function.
3668
3669@findex __builtin_classify_type
3670@item __builtin_classify_type (@var{object})
3671Since each machine has its own conventions for which data types are
3672passed in which kind of register, your implementation of @code{va_arg}
3673has to embody these conventions. The easiest way to categorize the
3674specified data type is to use @code{__builtin_classify_type} together
3675with @code{sizeof} and @code{__alignof__}.
3676
3677@code{__builtin_classify_type} ignores the value of @var{object},
3678considering only its data type. It returns an integer describing what
3679kind of type that is---integer, floating, pointer, structure, and so on.
3680
3681The file @file{typeclass.h} defines an enumeration that you can use to
3682interpret the values of @code{__builtin_classify_type}.
3683@end table
3684
3685These machine description macros help implement varargs:
3686
3687@table @code
3688@findex EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS
3689@item EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS (@var{args})
3690If defined, is a C expression that produces the machine-specific code
3691for a call to @code{__builtin_saveregs}. This code will be moved to the
3692very beginning of the function, before any parameter access are made.
3693The return value of this function should be an RTX that contains the
3694value to use as the return of @code{__builtin_saveregs}.
3695
3696The argument @var{args} is a @code{tree_list} containing the arguments
3697that were passed to @code{__builtin_saveregs}.
3698
3699If this macro is not defined, the compiler will output an ordinary
3700call to the library function @samp{__builtin_saveregs}.
3701
3702@c !!! a bug in texinfo; how to make the entry on the @item line allow
3703@c more than one line of text... help... --mew 10feb93
3704@findex SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS
3705@item SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS (@var{args_so_far}, @var{mode}, @var{type},
3706@var{pretend_args_size}, @var{second_time})
3707This macro offers an alternative to using @code{__builtin_saveregs} and
3708defining the macro @code{EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS}. Use it to store the
3709anonymous register arguments into the stack so that all the arguments
3710appear to have been passed consecutively on the stack. Once this is
3711done, you can use the standard implementation of varargs that works for
3712machines that pass all their arguments on the stack.
3713
3714The argument @var{args_so_far} is the @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS} data
3715structure, containing the values that obtain after processing of the
3716named arguments. The arguments @var{mode} and @var{type} describe the
3717last named argument---its machine mode and its data type as a tree node.
3718
3719The macro implementation should do two things: first, push onto the
3720stack all the argument registers @emph{not} used for the named
3721arguments, and second, store the size of the data thus pushed into the
3722@code{int}-valued variable whose name is supplied as the argument
3723@var{pretend_args_size}. The value that you store here will serve as
3724additional offset for setting up the stack frame.
3725
3726Because you must generate code to push the anonymous arguments at
3727compile time without knowing their data types,
3728@code{SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS} is only useful on machines that have just
3729a single category of argument register and use it uniformly for all data
3730types.
3731
3732If the argument @var{second_time} is nonzero, it means that the
3733arguments of the function are being analyzed for the second time. This
3734happens for an inline function, which is not actually compiled until the
3735end of the source file. The macro @code{SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS} should
3736not generate any instructions in this case.
3737
3738@findex STRICT_ARGUMENT_NAMING
3739@item STRICT_ARGUMENT_NAMING
e5e809f4
JL
3740Define this macro to be a nonzero value if the location where a function
3741argument is passed depends on whether or not it is a named argument.
feca2ed3
JW
3742
3743This macro controls how the @var{named} argument to @code{FUNCTION_ARG}
e5e809f4
JL
3744is set for varargs and stdarg functions. If this macro returns a
3745nonzero value, the @var{named} argument is always true for named
3746arguments, and false for unnamed arguments. If it returns a value of
3747zero, but @code{SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS} is defined, then all arguments
3748are treated as named. Otherwise, all named arguments except the last
3749are treated as named.
3750
3751You need not define this macro if it always returns zero.
feca2ed3
JW
3752@end table
3753
3754@node Trampolines
3755@section Trampolines for Nested Functions
3756@cindex trampolines for nested functions
3757@cindex nested functions, trampolines for
3758
3759A @dfn{trampoline} is a small piece of code that is created at run time
3760when the address of a nested function is taken. It normally resides on
3761the stack, in the stack frame of the containing function. These macros
3762tell GNU CC how to generate code to allocate and initialize a
3763trampoline.
3764
3765The instructions in the trampoline must do two things: load a constant
3766address into the static chain register, and jump to the real address of
3767the nested function. On CISC machines such as the m68k, this requires
3768two instructions, a move immediate and a jump. Then the two addresses
3769exist in the trampoline as word-long immediate operands. On RISC
3770machines, it is often necessary to load each address into a register in
3771two parts. Then pieces of each address form separate immediate
3772operands.
3773
3774The code generated to initialize the trampoline must store the variable
3775parts---the static chain value and the function address---into the
3776immediate operands of the instructions. On a CISC machine, this is
3777simply a matter of copying each address to a memory reference at the
3778proper offset from the start of the trampoline. On a RISC machine, it
3779may be necessary to take out pieces of the address and store them
3780separately.
3781
3782@table @code
3783@findex TRAMPOLINE_TEMPLATE
3784@item TRAMPOLINE_TEMPLATE (@var{file})
3785A C statement to output, on the stream @var{file}, assembler code for a
3786block of data that contains the constant parts of a trampoline. This
3787code should not include a label---the label is taken care of
3788automatically.
3789
3790If you do not define this macro, it means no template is needed
3791for the target. Do not define this macro on systems where the block move
3792code to copy the trampoline into place would be larger than the code
3793to generate it on the spot.
3794
3795@findex TRAMPOLINE_SECTION
3796@item TRAMPOLINE_SECTION
3797The name of a subroutine to switch to the section in which the
3798trampoline template is to be placed (@pxref{Sections}). The default is
3799a value of @samp{readonly_data_section}, which places the trampoline in
3800the section containing read-only data.
3801
3802@findex TRAMPOLINE_SIZE
3803@item TRAMPOLINE_SIZE
3804A C expression for the size in bytes of the trampoline, as an integer.
3805
3806@findex TRAMPOLINE_ALIGNMENT
3807@item TRAMPOLINE_ALIGNMENT
3808Alignment required for trampolines, in bits.
3809
3810If you don't define this macro, the value of @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}
3811is used for aligning trampolines.
3812
3813@findex INITIALIZE_TRAMPOLINE
3814@item INITIALIZE_TRAMPOLINE (@var{addr}, @var{fnaddr}, @var{static_chain})
3815A C statement to initialize the variable parts of a trampoline.
3816@var{addr} is an RTX for the address of the trampoline; @var{fnaddr} is
3817an RTX for the address of the nested function; @var{static_chain} is an
3818RTX for the static chain value that should be passed to the function
3819when it is called.
3820
3821@findex ALLOCATE_TRAMPOLINE
3822@item ALLOCATE_TRAMPOLINE (@var{fp})
3823A C expression to allocate run-time space for a trampoline. The
3824expression value should be an RTX representing a memory reference to the
3825space for the trampoline.
3826
3827@cindex @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} and trampolines
3828@cindex @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and trampolines
3829If this macro is not defined, by default the trampoline is allocated as
3830a stack slot. This default is right for most machines. The exceptions
3831are machines where it is impossible to execute instructions in the stack
3832area. On such machines, you may have to implement a separate stack,
3833using this macro in conjunction with @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and
3834@code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE}.
3835
3836@var{fp} points to a data structure, a @code{struct function}, which
3837describes the compilation status of the immediate containing function of
3838the function which the trampoline is for. Normally (when
3839@code{ALLOCATE_TRAMPOLINE} is not defined), the stack slot for the
3840trampoline is in the stack frame of this containing function. Other
3841allocation strategies probably must do something analogous with this
3842information.
3843@end table
3844
3845Implementing trampolines is difficult on many machines because they have
3846separate instruction and data caches. Writing into a stack location
3847fails to clear the memory in the instruction cache, so when the program
3848jumps to that location, it executes the old contents.
3849
3850Here are two possible solutions. One is to clear the relevant parts of
3851the instruction cache whenever a trampoline is set up. The other is to
3852make all trampolines identical, by having them jump to a standard
3853subroutine. The former technique makes trampoline execution faster; the
3854latter makes initialization faster.
3855
3856To clear the instruction cache when a trampoline is initialized, define
3857the following macros which describe the shape of the cache.
3858
3859@table @code
3860@findex INSN_CACHE_SIZE
3861@item INSN_CACHE_SIZE
3862The total size in bytes of the cache.
3863
3864@findex INSN_CACHE_LINE_WIDTH
3865@item INSN_CACHE_LINE_WIDTH
3866The length in bytes of each cache line. The cache is divided into cache
3867lines which are disjoint slots, each holding a contiguous chunk of data
3868fetched from memory. Each time data is brought into the cache, an
3869entire line is read at once. The data loaded into a cache line is
3870always aligned on a boundary equal to the line size.
3871
3872@findex INSN_CACHE_DEPTH
3873@item INSN_CACHE_DEPTH
3874The number of alternative cache lines that can hold any particular memory
3875location.
3876@end table
3877
3878Alternatively, if the machine has system calls or instructions to clear
3879the instruction cache directly, you can define the following macro.
3880
3881@table @code
3882@findex CLEAR_INSN_CACHE
3883@item CLEAR_INSN_CACHE (@var{BEG}, @var{END})
3884If defined, expands to a C expression clearing the @emph{instruction
3885cache} in the specified interval. If it is not defined, and the macro
3886INSN_CACHE_SIZE is defined, some generic code is generated to clear the
3887cache. The definition of this macro would typically be a series of
3888@code{asm} statements. Both @var{BEG} and @var{END} are both pointer
3889expressions.
3890@end table
3891
3892To use a standard subroutine, define the following macro. In addition,
3893you must make sure that the instructions in a trampoline fill an entire
3894cache line with identical instructions, or else ensure that the
3895beginning of the trampoline code is always aligned at the same point in
3896its cache line. Look in @file{m68k.h} as a guide.
3897
3898@table @code
3899@findex TRANSFER_FROM_TRAMPOLINE
3900@item TRANSFER_FROM_TRAMPOLINE
3901Define this macro if trampolines need a special subroutine to do their
3902work. The macro should expand to a series of @code{asm} statements
3903which will be compiled with GNU CC. They go in a library function named
3904@code{__transfer_from_trampoline}.
3905
3906If you need to avoid executing the ordinary prologue code of a compiled
3907C function when you jump to the subroutine, you can do so by placing a
3908special label of your own in the assembler code. Use one @code{asm}
3909statement to generate an assembler label, and another to make the label
3910global. Then trampolines can use that label to jump directly to your
3911special assembler code.
3912@end table
3913
3914@node Library Calls
3915@section Implicit Calls to Library Routines
3916@cindex library subroutine names
3917@cindex @file{libgcc.a}
3918
3919@c prevent bad page break with this line
3920Here is an explanation of implicit calls to library routines.
3921
3922@table @code
3923@findex MULSI3_LIBCALL
3924@item MULSI3_LIBCALL
3925A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for
3926multiplication of one signed full-word by another. If you do not
3927define this macro, the default name is used, which is @code{__mulsi3},
3928a function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
3929
3930@findex DIVSI3_LIBCALL
3931@item DIVSI3_LIBCALL
3932A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for
3933division of one signed full-word by another. If you do not define
3934this macro, the default name is used, which is @code{__divsi3}, a
3935function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
3936
3937@findex UDIVSI3_LIBCALL
3938@item UDIVSI3_LIBCALL
3939A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for
3940division of one unsigned full-word by another. If you do not define
3941this macro, the default name is used, which is @code{__udivsi3}, a
3942function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
3943
3944@findex MODSI3_LIBCALL
3945@item MODSI3_LIBCALL
3946A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for the
3947remainder in division of one signed full-word by another. If you do
3948not define this macro, the default name is used, which is
3949@code{__modsi3}, a function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
3950
3951@findex UMODSI3_LIBCALL
3952@item UMODSI3_LIBCALL
3953A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for the
3954remainder in division of one unsigned full-word by another. If you do
3955not define this macro, the default name is used, which is
3956@code{__umodsi3}, a function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
3957
3958@findex MULDI3_LIBCALL
3959@item MULDI3_LIBCALL
3960A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for
3961multiplication of one signed double-word by another. If you do not
3962define this macro, the default name is used, which is @code{__muldi3},
3963a function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
3964
3965@findex DIVDI3_LIBCALL
3966@item DIVDI3_LIBCALL
3967A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for
3968division of one signed double-word by another. If you do not define
3969this macro, the default name is used, which is @code{__divdi3}, a
3970function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
3971
3972@findex UDIVDI3_LIBCALL
3973@item UDIVDI3_LIBCALL
3974A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for
3975division of one unsigned full-word by another. If you do not define
3976this macro, the default name is used, which is @code{__udivdi3}, a
3977function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
3978
3979@findex MODDI3_LIBCALL
3980@item MODDI3_LIBCALL
3981A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for the
3982remainder in division of one signed double-word by another. If you do
3983not define this macro, the default name is used, which is
3984@code{__moddi3}, a function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
3985
3986@findex UMODDI3_LIBCALL
3987@item UMODDI3_LIBCALL
3988A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for the
3989remainder in division of one unsigned full-word by another. If you do
3990not define this macro, the default name is used, which is
3991@code{__umoddi3}, a function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
3992
3993@findex INIT_TARGET_OPTABS
3994@item INIT_TARGET_OPTABS
3995Define this macro as a C statement that declares additional library
3996routines renames existing ones. @code{init_optabs} calls this macro after
3997initializing all the normal library routines.
3998
3999@findex TARGET_EDOM
4000@cindex @code{EDOM}, implicit usage
4001@item TARGET_EDOM
4002The value of @code{EDOM} on the target machine, as a C integer constant
4003expression. If you don't define this macro, GNU CC does not attempt to
4004deposit the value of @code{EDOM} into @code{errno} directly. Look in
4005@file{/usr/include/errno.h} to find the value of @code{EDOM} on your
4006system.
4007
4008If you do not define @code{TARGET_EDOM}, then compiled code reports
4009domain errors by calling the library function and letting it report the
4010error. If mathematical functions on your system use @code{matherr} when
4011there is an error, then you should leave @code{TARGET_EDOM} undefined so
4012that @code{matherr} is used normally.
4013
4014@findex GEN_ERRNO_RTX
4015@cindex @code{errno}, implicit usage
4016@item GEN_ERRNO_RTX
4017Define this macro as a C expression to create an rtl expression that
4018refers to the global ``variable'' @code{errno}. (On certain systems,
4019@code{errno} may not actually be a variable.) If you don't define this
4020macro, a reasonable default is used.
4021
4022@findex TARGET_MEM_FUNCTIONS
4023@cindex @code{bcopy}, implicit usage
4024@cindex @code{memcpy}, implicit usage
4025@cindex @code{bzero}, implicit usage
4026@cindex @code{memset}, implicit usage
4027@item TARGET_MEM_FUNCTIONS
4028Define this macro if GNU CC should generate calls to the System V
4029(and ANSI C) library functions @code{memcpy} and @code{memset}
4030rather than the BSD functions @code{bcopy} and @code{bzero}.
4031
4032@findex LIBGCC_NEEDS_DOUBLE
4033@item LIBGCC_NEEDS_DOUBLE
4034Define this macro if only @code{float} arguments cannot be passed to
4035library routines (so they must be converted to @code{double}). This
4036macro affects both how library calls are generated and how the library
4037routines in @file{libgcc1.c} accept their arguments. It is useful on
4038machines where floating and fixed point arguments are passed
4039differently, such as the i860.
4040
4041@findex FLOAT_ARG_TYPE
4042@item FLOAT_ARG_TYPE
4043Define this macro to override the type used by the library routines to
4044pick up arguments of type @code{float}. (By default, they use a union
4045of @code{float} and @code{int}.)
4046
4047The obvious choice would be @code{float}---but that won't work with
4048traditional C compilers that expect all arguments declared as @code{float}
4049to arrive as @code{double}. To avoid this conversion, the library routines
4050ask for the value as some other type and then treat it as a @code{float}.
4051
4052On some systems, no other type will work for this. For these systems,
4053you must use @code{LIBGCC_NEEDS_DOUBLE} instead, to force conversion of
4054the values @code{double} before they are passed.
4055
4056@findex FLOATIFY
4057@item FLOATIFY (@var{passed-value})
4058Define this macro to override the way library routines redesignate a
4059@code{float} argument as a @code{float} instead of the type it was
4060passed as. The default is an expression which takes the @code{float}
4061field of the union.
4062
4063@findex FLOAT_VALUE_TYPE
4064@item FLOAT_VALUE_TYPE
4065Define this macro to override the type used by the library routines to
4066return values that ought to have type @code{float}. (By default, they
4067use @code{int}.)
4068
4069The obvious choice would be @code{float}---but that won't work with
4070traditional C compilers gratuitously convert values declared as
4071@code{float} into @code{double}.
4072
4073@findex INTIFY
4074@item INTIFY (@var{float-value})
4075Define this macro to override the way the value of a
4076@code{float}-returning library routine should be packaged in order to
4077return it. These functions are actually declared to return type
4078@code{FLOAT_VALUE_TYPE} (normally @code{int}).
4079
4080These values can't be returned as type @code{float} because traditional
4081C compilers would gratuitously convert the value to a @code{double}.
4082
4083A local variable named @code{intify} is always available when the macro
4084@code{INTIFY} is used. It is a union of a @code{float} field named
4085@code{f} and a field named @code{i} whose type is
4086@code{FLOAT_VALUE_TYPE} or @code{int}.
4087
4088If you don't define this macro, the default definition works by copying
4089the value through that union.
4090
4091@findex nongcc_SI_type
4092@item nongcc_SI_type
4093Define this macro as the name of the data type corresponding to
4094@code{SImode} in the system's own C compiler.
4095
4096You need not define this macro if that type is @code{long int}, as it usually
4097is.
4098
4099@findex nongcc_word_type
4100@item nongcc_word_type
4101Define this macro as the name of the data type corresponding to the
4102word_mode in the system's own C compiler.
4103
4104You need not define this macro if that type is @code{long int}, as it usually
4105is.
4106
4107@findex perform_@dots{}
4108@item perform_@dots{}
4109Define these macros to supply explicit C statements to carry out various
4110arithmetic operations on types @code{float} and @code{double} in the
4111library routines in @file{libgcc1.c}. See that file for a full list
4112of these macros and their arguments.
4113
4114On most machines, you don't need to define any of these macros, because
4115the C compiler that comes with the system takes care of doing them.
4116
4117@findex NEXT_OBJC_RUNTIME
4118@item NEXT_OBJC_RUNTIME
4119Define this macro to generate code for Objective C message sending using
4120the calling convention of the NeXT system. This calling convention
4121involves passing the object, the selector and the method arguments all
4122at once to the method-lookup library function.
4123
4124The default calling convention passes just the object and the selector
4125to the lookup function, which returns a pointer to the method.
4126@end table
4127
4128@node Addressing Modes
4129@section Addressing Modes
4130@cindex addressing modes
4131
4132@c prevent bad page break with this line
4133This is about addressing modes.
4134
4135@table @code
4136@findex HAVE_POST_INCREMENT
4137@item HAVE_POST_INCREMENT
4138Define this macro if the machine supports post-increment addressing.
4139
4140@findex HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT
4141@findex HAVE_POST_DECREMENT
4142@findex HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT
4143@item HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT
4144@itemx HAVE_POST_DECREMENT
4145@itemx HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT
4146Similar for other kinds of addressing.
4147
4148@findex CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P
4149@item CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P (@var{x})
4150A C expression that is 1 if the RTX @var{x} is a constant which
4151is a valid address. On most machines, this can be defined as
4152@code{CONSTANT_P (@var{x})}, but a few machines are more restrictive
4153in which constant addresses are supported.
4154
4155@findex CONSTANT_P
4156@code{CONSTANT_P} accepts integer-values expressions whose values are
4157not explicitly known, such as @code{symbol_ref}, @code{label_ref}, and
4158@code{high} expressions and @code{const} arithmetic expressions, in
4159addition to @code{const_int} and @code{const_double} expressions.
4160
4161@findex MAX_REGS_PER_ADDRESS
4162@item MAX_REGS_PER_ADDRESS
4163A number, the maximum number of registers that can appear in a valid
4164memory address. Note that it is up to you to specify a value equal to
4165the maximum number that @code{GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS} would ever
4166accept.
4167
4168@findex GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS
4169@item GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS (@var{mode}, @var{x}, @var{label})
4170A C compound statement with a conditional @code{goto @var{label};}
4171executed if @var{x} (an RTX) is a legitimate memory address on the
4172target machine for a memory operand of mode @var{mode}.
4173
4174It usually pays to define several simpler macros to serve as
4175subroutines for this one. Otherwise it may be too complicated to
4176understand.
4177
4178This macro must exist in two variants: a strict variant and a
4179non-strict one. The strict variant is used in the reload pass. It
4180must be defined so that any pseudo-register that has not been
4181allocated a hard register is considered a memory reference. In
4182contexts where some kind of register is required, a pseudo-register
4183with no hard register must be rejected.
4184
4185The non-strict variant is used in other passes. It must be defined to
4186accept all pseudo-registers in every context where some kind of
4187register is required.
4188
4189@findex REG_OK_STRICT
4190Compiler source files that want to use the strict variant of this
4191macro define the macro @code{REG_OK_STRICT}. You should use an
4192@code{#ifdef REG_OK_STRICT} conditional to define the strict variant
4193in that case and the non-strict variant otherwise.
4194
4195Subroutines to check for acceptable registers for various purposes (one
4196for base registers, one for index registers, and so on) are typically
4197among the subroutines used to define @code{GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS}.
4198Then only these subroutine macros need have two variants; the higher
4199levels of macros may be the same whether strict or not.@refill
4200
4201Normally, constant addresses which are the sum of a @code{symbol_ref}
4202and an integer are stored inside a @code{const} RTX to mark them as
4203constant. Therefore, there is no need to recognize such sums
4204specifically as legitimate addresses. Normally you would simply
4205recognize any @code{const} as legitimate.
4206
4207Usually @code{PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS} is not prepared to handle constant
4208sums that are not marked with @code{const}. It assumes that a naked
4209@code{plus} indicates indexing. If so, then you @emph{must} reject such
4210naked constant sums as illegitimate addresses, so that none of them will
4211be given to @code{PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS}.
4212
4213@cindex @code{ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} and address validation
4214On some machines, whether a symbolic address is legitimate depends on
4215the section that the address refers to. On these machines, define the
4216macro @code{ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} to store the information into the
4217@code{symbol_ref}, and then check for it here. When you see a
4218@code{const}, you will have to look inside it to find the
4219@code{symbol_ref} in order to determine the section. @xref{Assembler
4220Format}.
4221
4222@findex saveable_obstack
4223The best way to modify the name string is by adding text to the
4224beginning, with suitable punctuation to prevent any ambiguity. Allocate
4225the new name in @code{saveable_obstack}. You will have to modify
4226@code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} to remove and decode the added text and
4227output the name accordingly, and define @code{STRIP_NAME_ENCODING} to
4228access the original name string.
4229
4230You can check the information stored here into the @code{symbol_ref} in
4231the definitions of the macros @code{GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS} and
4232@code{PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS}.
4233
4234@findex REG_OK_FOR_BASE_P
4235@item REG_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{x})
4236A C expression that is nonzero if @var{x} (assumed to be a @code{reg}
4237RTX) is valid for use as a base register. For hard registers, it
4238should always accept those which the hardware permits and reject the
4239others. Whether the macro accepts or rejects pseudo registers must be
4240controlled by @code{REG_OK_STRICT} as described above. This usually
4241requires two variant definitions, of which @code{REG_OK_STRICT}
4242controls the one actually used.
4243
861bb6c1
JL
4244@findex REG_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P
4245@item REG_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{x}, @var{mode})
4246A C expression that is just like @code{REG_OK_FOR_BASE_P}, except that
4247that expression may examine the mode of the memory reference in
4248@var{mode}. You should define this macro if the mode of the memory
4249reference affects whether a register may be used as a base register. If
4250you define this macro, the compiler will use it instead of
4251@code{REG_OK_FOR_BASE_P}.
4252
feca2ed3
JW
4253@findex REG_OK_FOR_INDEX_P
4254@item REG_OK_FOR_INDEX_P (@var{x})
4255A C expression that is nonzero if @var{x} (assumed to be a @code{reg}
4256RTX) is valid for use as an index register.
4257
4258The difference between an index register and a base register is that
4259the index register may be scaled. If an address involves the sum of
4260two registers, neither one of them scaled, then either one may be
4261labeled the ``base'' and the other the ``index''; but whichever
4262labeling is used must fit the machine's constraints of which registers
4263may serve in each capacity. The compiler will try both labelings,
4264looking for one that is valid, and will reload one or both registers
4265only if neither labeling works.
4266
4267@findex LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS
4268@item LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS (@var{x}, @var{oldx}, @var{mode}, @var{win})
4269A C compound statement that attempts to replace @var{x} with a valid
4270memory address for an operand of mode @var{mode}. @var{win} will be a
4271C statement label elsewhere in the code; the macro definition may use
4272
4273@example
4274GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS (@var{mode}, @var{x}, @var{win});
4275@end example
4276
4277@noindent
4278to avoid further processing if the address has become legitimate.
4279
4280@findex break_out_memory_refs
4281@var{x} will always be the result of a call to @code{break_out_memory_refs},
4282and @var{oldx} will be the operand that was given to that function to produce
4283@var{x}.
4284
4285The code generated by this macro should not alter the substructure of
4286@var{x}. If it transforms @var{x} into a more legitimate form, it
4287should assign @var{x} (which will always be a C variable) a new value.
4288
4289It is not necessary for this macro to come up with a legitimate
4290address. The compiler has standard ways of doing so in all cases. In
4291fact, it is safe for this macro to do nothing. But often a
4292machine-dependent strategy can generate better code.
4293
a9a2595b
JR
4294@findex LEGITIMIZE_RELOAD_ADDRESS
4295@item LEGITIMIZE_RELOAD_ADDRESS (@var{x}, @var{mode}, @var{opnum}, @var{type}, @var{ind_levels}, @var{win})
4296A C compound statement that attempts to replace @var{x}, which is an address
4297that needs reloading, with a valid memory address for an operand of mode
4298@var{mode}. @var{win} will be a C statement label elsewhere in the code.
4299It is not necessary to define this macro, but it might be useful for
4300performance reasons.
4301
4302For example, on the i386, it is sometimes possible to use a single
4303reload register instead of two by reloading a sum of two pseudo
4304registers into a register. On the other hand, for number of RISC
4305processors offsets are limited so that often an intermediate address
4306needs to be generated in order to address a stack slot. By defining
4307LEGITIMIZE_RELOAD_ADDRESS appropriately, the intermediate addresses
4308generated for adjacent some stack slots can be made identical, and thus
4309be shared.
4310
39bdfaa0
RH
4311@emph{Note}: This macro should be used with caution. It is necessary
4312to know something of how reload works in order to effectively use this,
4313and it is quite easy to produce macros that build in too much knowledge
4314of reload internals.
a9a2595b 4315
5f0c590d
JL
4316@emph{Note}: This macro must be able to reload an address created by a
4317previous invocation of this macro. If it fails to handle such addresses
4318then the compiler may generate incorrect code or abort.
4319
a9a2595b 4320@findex push_reload
39bdfaa0
RH
4321The macro definition should use @code{push_reload} to indicate parts that
4322need reloading; @var{opnum}, @var{type} and @var{ind_levels} are usually
4323suitable to be passed unaltered to @code{push_reload}.
a9a2595b 4324
39bdfaa0 4325The code generated by this macro must not alter the substructure of
a9a2595b
JR
4326@var{x}. If it transforms @var{x} into a more legitimate form, it
4327should assign @var{x} (which will always be a C variable) a new value.
4328This also applies to parts that you change indirectly by calling
4329@code{push_reload}.
4330
39bdfaa0
RH
4331@findex strict_memory_address_p
4332The macro definition may use @code{strict_memory_address_p} to test if
4333the address has become legitimate.
4334
a9a2595b
JR
4335@findex copy_rtx
4336If you want to change only a part of @var{x}, one standard way of doing
4337this is to use @code{copy_rtx}. Note, however, that is unshares only a
4338single level of rtl. Thus, if the part to be changed is not at the
4339top level, you'll need to replace first the top leve
4340It is not necessary for this macro to come up with a legitimate
4341address; but often a machine-dependent strategy can generate better code.
4342
feca2ed3
JW
4343@findex GO_IF_MODE_DEPENDENT_ADDRESS
4344@item GO_IF_MODE_DEPENDENT_ADDRESS (@var{addr}, @var{label})
4345A C statement or compound statement with a conditional @code{goto
4346@var{label};} executed if memory address @var{x} (an RTX) can have
4347different meanings depending on the machine mode of the memory
4348reference it is used for or if the address is valid for some modes
4349but not others.
4350
4351Autoincrement and autodecrement addresses typically have mode-dependent
4352effects because the amount of the increment or decrement is the size
4353of the operand being addressed. Some machines have other mode-dependent
4354addresses. Many RISC machines have no mode-dependent addresses.
4355
4356You may assume that @var{addr} is a valid address for the machine.
4357
4358@findex LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P
4359@item LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P (@var{x})
4360A C expression that is nonzero if @var{x} is a legitimate constant for
4361an immediate operand on the target machine. You can assume that
4362@var{x} satisfies @code{CONSTANT_P}, so you need not check this. In fact,
4363@samp{1} is a suitable definition for this macro on machines where
4364anything @code{CONSTANT_P} is valid.@refill
39dfb55a
JL
4365
4366@findex DONT_RECORD_EQUIVALENCE
4367@item DONT_RECORD_EQUIVALENCE (@var{note})
4368A C expression that is nonzero if the @code{REG_EQUAL} note @var{x} should not
4369be promoted to a @code{REG_EQUIV} note.
4370
4371Define this macro if @var{note} refers to a constant that must be accepted
4372by @code{LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P}, but must not appear as an immediate operand.
4373
4374Most machine descriptions do not need to define this macro.
feca2ed3
JW
4375@end table
4376
4377@node Condition Code
4378@section Condition Code Status
4379@cindex condition code status
4380
4381@c prevent bad page break with this line
4382This describes the condition code status.
4383
4384@findex cc_status
4385The file @file{conditions.h} defines a variable @code{cc_status} to
4386describe how the condition code was computed (in case the interpretation of
4387the condition code depends on the instruction that it was set by). This
4388variable contains the RTL expressions on which the condition code is
4389currently based, and several standard flags.
4390
4391Sometimes additional machine-specific flags must be defined in the machine
4392description header file. It can also add additional machine-specific
4393information by defining @code{CC_STATUS_MDEP}.
4394
4395@table @code
4396@findex CC_STATUS_MDEP
4397@item CC_STATUS_MDEP
4398C code for a data type which is used for declaring the @code{mdep}
4399component of @code{cc_status}. It defaults to @code{int}.
4400
4401This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
4402
4403@findex CC_STATUS_MDEP_INIT
4404@item CC_STATUS_MDEP_INIT
4405A C expression to initialize the @code{mdep} field to ``empty''.
4406The default definition does nothing, since most machines don't use
4407the field anyway. If you want to use the field, you should probably
4408define this macro to initialize it.
4409
4410This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
4411
4412@findex NOTICE_UPDATE_CC
4413@item NOTICE_UPDATE_CC (@var{exp}, @var{insn})
4414A C compound statement to set the components of @code{cc_status}
4415appropriately for an insn @var{insn} whose body is @var{exp}. It is
4416this macro's responsibility to recognize insns that set the condition
4417code as a byproduct of other activity as well as those that explicitly
4418set @code{(cc0)}.
4419
4420This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
4421
4422If there are insns that do not set the condition code but do alter
4423other machine registers, this macro must check to see whether they
4424invalidate the expressions that the condition code is recorded as
4425reflecting. For example, on the 68000, insns that store in address
4426registers do not set the condition code, which means that usually
4427@code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} can leave @code{cc_status} unaltered for such
4428insns. But suppose that the previous insn set the condition code
4429based on location @samp{a4@@(102)} and the current insn stores a new
4430value in @samp{a4}. Although the condition code is not changed by
4431this, it will no longer be true that it reflects the contents of
4432@samp{a4@@(102)}. Therefore, @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} must alter
4433@code{cc_status} in this case to say that nothing is known about the
4434condition code value.
4435
4436The definition of @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} must be prepared to deal
4437with the results of peephole optimization: insns whose patterns are
4438@code{parallel} RTXs containing various @code{reg}, @code{mem} or
4439constants which are just the operands. The RTL structure of these
4440insns is not sufficient to indicate what the insns actually do. What
4441@code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} should do when it sees one is just to run
4442@code{CC_STATUS_INIT}.
4443
4444A possible definition of @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} is to call a function
4445that looks at an attribute (@pxref{Insn Attributes}) named, for example,
4446@samp{cc}. This avoids having detailed information about patterns in
4447two places, the @file{md} file and in @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC}.
4448
4449@findex EXTRA_CC_MODES
4450@item EXTRA_CC_MODES
4451A list of names to be used for additional modes for condition code
4452values in registers (@pxref{Jump Patterns}). These names are added
4453to @code{enum machine_mode} and all have class @code{MODE_CC}. By
4454convention, they should start with @samp{CC} and end with @samp{mode}.
4455
4456You should only define this macro if your machine does not use @code{cc0}
4457and only if additional modes are required.
4458
4459@findex EXTRA_CC_NAMES
4460@item EXTRA_CC_NAMES
4461A list of C strings giving the names for the modes listed in
4462@code{EXTRA_CC_MODES}. For example, the Sparc defines this macro and
4463@code{EXTRA_CC_MODES} as
4464
4465@smallexample
4466#define EXTRA_CC_MODES CC_NOOVmode, CCFPmode, CCFPEmode
4467#define EXTRA_CC_NAMES "CC_NOOV", "CCFP", "CCFPE"
4468@end smallexample
4469
4470This macro is not required if @code{EXTRA_CC_MODES} is not defined.
4471
4472@findex SELECT_CC_MODE
4473@item SELECT_CC_MODE (@var{op}, @var{x}, @var{y})
4474Returns a mode from class @code{MODE_CC} to be used when comparison
4475operation code @var{op} is applied to rtx @var{x} and @var{y}. For
4476example, on the Sparc, @code{SELECT_CC_MODE} is defined as (see
4477@pxref{Jump Patterns} for a description of the reason for this
4478definition)
4479
4480@smallexample
4481#define SELECT_CC_MODE(OP,X,Y) \
4482 (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (X)) == MODE_FLOAT \
4483 ? ((OP == EQ || OP == NE) ? CCFPmode : CCFPEmode) \
4484 : ((GET_CODE (X) == PLUS || GET_CODE (X) == MINUS \
4485 || GET_CODE (X) == NEG) \
4486 ? CC_NOOVmode : CCmode))
4487@end smallexample
4488
4489You need not define this macro if @code{EXTRA_CC_MODES} is not defined.
4490
4491@findex CANONICALIZE_COMPARISON
4492@item CANONICALIZE_COMPARISON (@var{code}, @var{op0}, @var{op1})
4493One some machines not all possible comparisons are defined, but you can
4494convert an invalid comparison into a valid one. For example, the Alpha
4495does not have a @code{GT} comparison, but you can use an @code{LT}
4496comparison instead and swap the order of the operands.
4497
4498On such machines, define this macro to be a C statement to do any
4499required conversions. @var{code} is the initial comparison code
4500and @var{op0} and @var{op1} are the left and right operands of the
4501comparison, respectively. You should modify @var{code}, @var{op0}, and
4502@var{op1} as required.
4503
4504GNU CC will not assume that the comparison resulting from this macro is
4505valid but will see if the resulting insn matches a pattern in the
4506@file{md} file.
4507
4508You need not define this macro if it would never change the comparison
4509code or operands.
4510
4511@findex REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE
4512@item REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE (@var{mode})
4513A C expression whose value is one if it is always safe to reverse a
4514comparison whose mode is @var{mode}. If @code{SELECT_CC_MODE}
4515can ever return @var{mode} for a floating-point inequality comparison,
4516then @code{REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE (@var{mode})} must be zero.
4517
4518You need not define this macro if it would always returns zero or if the
4519floating-point format is anything other than @code{IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT}.
4520For example, here is the definition used on the Sparc, where floating-point
4521inequality comparisons are always given @code{CCFPEmode}:
4522
4523@smallexample
4524#define REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE(MODE) ((MODE) != CCFPEmode)
4525@end smallexample
4526
4527@end table
4528
4529@node Costs
4530@section Describing Relative Costs of Operations
4531@cindex costs of instructions
4532@cindex relative costs
4533@cindex speed of instructions
4534
4535These macros let you describe the relative speed of various operations
4536on the target machine.
4537
4538@table @code
4539@findex CONST_COSTS
4540@item CONST_COSTS (@var{x}, @var{code}, @var{outer_code})
4541A part of a C @code{switch} statement that describes the relative costs
4542of constant RTL expressions. It must contain @code{case} labels for
4543expression codes @code{const_int}, @code{const}, @code{symbol_ref},
4544@code{label_ref} and @code{const_double}. Each case must ultimately
4545reach a @code{return} statement to return the relative cost of the use
4546of that kind of constant value in an expression. The cost may depend on
4547the precise value of the constant, which is available for examination in
4548@var{x}, and the rtx code of the expression in which it is contained,
4549found in @var{outer_code}.
4550
4551@var{code} is the expression code---redundant, since it can be
4552obtained with @code{GET_CODE (@var{x})}.
4553
4554@findex RTX_COSTS
4555@findex COSTS_N_INSNS
4556@item RTX_COSTS (@var{x}, @var{code}, @var{outer_code})
4557Like @code{CONST_COSTS} but applies to nonconstant RTL expressions.
4558This can be used, for example, to indicate how costly a multiply
4559instruction is. In writing this macro, you can use the construct
4560@code{COSTS_N_INSNS (@var{n})} to specify a cost equal to @var{n} fast
4561instructions. @var{outer_code} is the code of the expression in which
4562@var{x} is contained.
4563
4564This macro is optional; do not define it if the default cost assumptions
4565are adequate for the target machine.
4566
8625fab5
KG
4567@findex DEFAULT_RTX_COSTS
4568@item DEFAULT_RTX_COSTS (@var{x}, @var{code}, @var{outer_code})
4569This macro, if defined, is called for any case not handled by the
4570@code{RTX_COSTS} or @code{CONST_COSTS} macros. This eliminates the need
4571to put case labels into the macro, but the code, or any functions it
4572calls, must assume that the RTL in @var{x} could be of any type that has
4573not already been handled. The arguments are the same as for
4574@code{RTX_COSTS}, and the macro should execute a return statement giving
4575the cost of any RTL expressions that it can handle. The default cost
4576calculation is used for any RTL for which this macro does not return a
4577value.
4578
4579This macro is optional; do not define it if the default cost assumptions
4580are adequate for the target machine.
4581
feca2ed3
JW
4582@findex ADDRESS_COST
4583@item ADDRESS_COST (@var{address})
4584An expression giving the cost of an addressing mode that contains
4585@var{address}. If not defined, the cost is computed from
4586the @var{address} expression and the @code{CONST_COSTS} values.
4587
4588For most CISC machines, the default cost is a good approximation of the
4589true cost of the addressing mode. However, on RISC machines, all
4590instructions normally have the same length and execution time. Hence
4591all addresses will have equal costs.
4592
4593In cases where more than one form of an address is known, the form with
4594the lowest cost will be used. If multiple forms have the same, lowest,
4595cost, the one that is the most complex will be used.
4596
4597For example, suppose an address that is equal to the sum of a register
4598and a constant is used twice in the same basic block. When this macro
4599is not defined, the address will be computed in a register and memory
4600references will be indirect through that register. On machines where
4601the cost of the addressing mode containing the sum is no higher than
4602that of a simple indirect reference, this will produce an additional
4603instruction and possibly require an additional register. Proper
4604specification of this macro eliminates this overhead for such machines.
4605
4606Similar use of this macro is made in strength reduction of loops.
4607
4608@var{address} need not be valid as an address. In such a case, the cost
4609is not relevant and can be any value; invalid addresses need not be
4610assigned a different cost.
4611
4612On machines where an address involving more than one register is as
4613cheap as an address computation involving only one register, defining
4614@code{ADDRESS_COST} to reflect this can cause two registers to be live
4615over a region of code where only one would have been if
4616@code{ADDRESS_COST} were not defined in that manner. This effect should
4617be considered in the definition of this macro. Equivalent costs should
4618probably only be given to addresses with different numbers of registers
4619on machines with lots of registers.
4620
4621This macro will normally either not be defined or be defined as a
4622constant.
4623
4624@findex REGISTER_MOVE_COST
4625@item REGISTER_MOVE_COST (@var{from}, @var{to})
4626A C expression for the cost of moving data from a register in class
4627@var{from} to one in class @var{to}. The classes are expressed using
4628the enumeration values such as @code{GENERAL_REGS}. A value of 2 is the
4629default; other values are interpreted relative to that.
4630
4631It is not required that the cost always equal 2 when @var{from} is the
4632same as @var{to}; on some machines it is expensive to move between
4633registers if they are not general registers.
4634
4635If reload sees an insn consisting of a single @code{set} between two
4636hard registers, and if @code{REGISTER_MOVE_COST} applied to their
4637classes returns a value of 2, reload does not check to ensure that the
4638constraints of the insn are met. Setting a cost of other than 2 will
4639allow reload to verify that the constraints are met. You should do this
4640if the @samp{mov@var{m}} pattern's constraints do not allow such copying.
4641
4642@findex MEMORY_MOVE_COST
cbd5b9a2
KR
4643@item MEMORY_MOVE_COST (@var{mode}, @var{class}, @var{in})
4644A C expression for the cost of moving data of mode @var{mode} between a
4645register of class @var{class} and memory; @var{in} is zero if the value
473fe49b
KR
4646is to be written to memory, non-zero if it is to be read in. This cost
4647is relative to those in @code{REGISTER_MOVE_COST}. If moving between
4648registers and memory is more expensive than between two registers, you
4649should define this macro to express the relative cost.
4650
4651If you do not define this macro, GNU CC uses a default cost of 4 plus
38e01259 4652the cost of copying via a secondary reload register, if one is
473fe49b
KR
4653needed. If your machine requires a secondary reload register to copy
4654between memory and a register of @var{class} but the reload mechanism is
4655more complex than copying via an intermediate, define this macro to
4656reflect the actual cost of the move.
4657
4658GNU CC defines the function @code{memory_move_secondary_cost} if
4659secondary reloads are needed. It computes the costs due to copying via
4660a secondary register. If your machine copies from memory using a
4661secondary register in the conventional way but the default base value of
46624 is not correct for your machine, define this macro to add some other
4663value to the result of that function. The arguments to that function
4664are the same as to this macro.
cbd5b9a2 4665
feca2ed3
JW
4666@findex BRANCH_COST
4667@item BRANCH_COST
4668A C expression for the cost of a branch instruction. A value of 1 is
4669the default; other values are interpreted relative to that.
4670@end table
4671
4672Here are additional macros which do not specify precise relative costs,
4673but only that certain actions are more expensive than GNU CC would
4674ordinarily expect.
4675
4676@table @code
4677@findex SLOW_BYTE_ACCESS
4678@item SLOW_BYTE_ACCESS
4679Define this macro as a C expression which is nonzero if accessing less
4680than a word of memory (i.e. a @code{char} or a @code{short}) is no
4681faster than accessing a word of memory, i.e., if such access
4682require more than one instruction or if there is no difference in cost
4683between byte and (aligned) word loads.
4684
4685When this macro is not defined, the compiler will access a field by
4686finding the smallest containing object; when it is defined, a fullword
4687load will be used if alignment permits. Unless bytes accesses are
4688faster than word accesses, using word accesses is preferable since it
4689may eliminate subsequent memory access if subsequent accesses occur to
4690other fields in the same word of the structure, but to different bytes.
4691
4692@findex SLOW_ZERO_EXTEND
4693@item SLOW_ZERO_EXTEND
4694Define this macro if zero-extension (of a @code{char} or @code{short}
4695to an @code{int}) can be done faster if the destination is a register
4696that is known to be zero.
4697
4698If you define this macro, you must have instruction patterns that
4699recognize RTL structures like this:
4700
4701@smallexample
4702(set (strict_low_part (subreg:QI (reg:SI @dots{}) 0)) @dots{})
4703@end smallexample
4704
4705@noindent
4706and likewise for @code{HImode}.
4707
4708@findex SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS
4709@item SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS
4710Define this macro to be the value 1 if unaligned accesses have a cost
4711many times greater than aligned accesses, for example if they are
4712emulated in a trap handler.
4713
4714When this macro is non-zero, the compiler will act as if
4715@code{STRICT_ALIGNMENT} were non-zero when generating code for block
4716moves. This can cause significantly more instructions to be produced.
4717Therefore, do not set this macro non-zero if unaligned accesses only add a
4718cycle or two to the time for a memory access.
4719
4720If the value of this macro is always zero, it need not be defined.
4721
4722@findex DONT_REDUCE_ADDR
4723@item DONT_REDUCE_ADDR
4724Define this macro to inhibit strength reduction of memory addresses.
4725(On some machines, such strength reduction seems to do harm rather
4726than good.)
4727
4728@findex MOVE_RATIO
4729@item MOVE_RATIO
9862dea9
HPN
4730The threshold of number of scalar memory-to-memory move insns, @emph{below}
4731which a sequence of insns should be generated instead of a
feca2ed3
JW
4732string move insn or a library call. Increasing the value will always
4733make code faster, but eventually incurs high cost in increased code size.
4734
9862dea9
HPN
4735Note that on machines with no memory-to-memory move insns, this macro denotes
4736the corresponding number of memory-to-memory @emph{sequences}.
4737
feca2ed3
JW
4738If you don't define this, a reasonable default is used.
4739
4740@findex NO_FUNCTION_CSE
4741@item NO_FUNCTION_CSE
4742Define this macro if it is as good or better to call a constant
4743function address than to call an address kept in a register.
4744
4745@findex NO_RECURSIVE_FUNCTION_CSE
4746@item NO_RECURSIVE_FUNCTION_CSE
4747Define this macro if it is as good or better for a function to call
4748itself with an explicit address than to call an address kept in a
4749register.
4750
4751@findex ADJUST_COST
4752@item ADJUST_COST (@var{insn}, @var{link}, @var{dep_insn}, @var{cost})
4753A C statement (sans semicolon) to update the integer variable @var{cost}
4754based on the relationship between @var{insn} that is dependent on
4755@var{dep_insn} through the dependence @var{link}. The default is to
4756make no adjustment to @var{cost}. This can be used for example to
4757specify to the scheduler that an output- or anti-dependence does not
4758incur the same cost as a data-dependence.
4759
4760@findex ADJUST_PRIORITY
4761@item ADJUST_PRIORITY (@var{insn})
4762A C statement (sans semicolon) to update the integer scheduling
4763priority @code{INSN_PRIORITY(@var{insn})}. Reduce the priority
4764to execute the @var{insn} earlier, increase the priority to execute
4765@var{insn} later. Do not define this macro if you do not need to
4766adjust the scheduling priorities of insns.
4767@end table
4768
4769@node Sections
4770@section Dividing the Output into Sections (Texts, Data, @dots{})
4771@c the above section title is WAY too long. maybe cut the part between
4772@c the (...)? --mew 10feb93
4773
4774An object file is divided into sections containing different types of
4775data. In the most common case, there are three sections: the @dfn{text
4776section}, which holds instructions and read-only data; the @dfn{data
4777section}, which holds initialized writable data; and the @dfn{bss
4778section}, which holds uninitialized data. Some systems have other kinds
4779of sections.
4780
4781The compiler must tell the assembler when to switch sections. These
4782macros control what commands to output to tell the assembler this. You
4783can also define additional sections.
4784
4785@table @code
4786@findex TEXT_SECTION_ASM_OP
4787@item TEXT_SECTION_ASM_OP
4788A C expression whose value is a string containing the assembler
4789operation that should precede instructions and read-only data. Normally
4790@code{".text"} is right.
4791
4792@findex DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP
4793@item DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP
4794A C expression whose value is a string containing the assembler
4795operation to identify the following data as writable initialized data.
4796Normally @code{".data"} is right.
4797
4798@findex SHARED_SECTION_ASM_OP
4799@item SHARED_SECTION_ASM_OP
4800If defined, a C expression whose value is a string containing the
4801assembler operation to identify the following data as shared data. If
4802not defined, @code{DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP} will be used.
4803
4804@findex BSS_SECTION_ASM_OP
4805@item BSS_SECTION_ASM_OP
4806If defined, a C expression whose value is a string containing the
4807assembler operation to identify the following data as uninitialized global
4808data. If not defined, and neither @code{ASM_OUTPUT_BSS} nor
4809@code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_BSS} are defined, uninitialized global data will be
4810output in the data section if @samp{-fno-common} is passed, otherwise
4811@code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} will be used.
4812
4813@findex SHARED_BSS_SECTION_ASM_OP
4814@item SHARED_BSS_SECTION_ASM_OP
4815If defined, a C expression whose value is a string containing the
4816assembler operation to identify the following data as uninitialized global
4817shared data. If not defined, and @code{BSS_SECTION_ASM_OP} is, the latter
4818will be used.
4819
4820@findex INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP
4821@item INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP
4822If defined, a C expression whose value is a string containing the
4823assembler operation to identify the following data as initialization
4824code. If not defined, GNU CC will assume such a section does not
4825exist.
4826
4827@findex EXTRA_SECTIONS
4828@findex in_text
4829@findex in_data
4830@item EXTRA_SECTIONS
4831A list of names for sections other than the standard two, which are
4832@code{in_text} and @code{in_data}. You need not define this macro
4833on a system with no other sections (that GCC needs to use).
4834
4835@findex EXTRA_SECTION_FUNCTIONS
4836@findex text_section
4837@findex data_section
4838@item EXTRA_SECTION_FUNCTIONS
4839One or more functions to be defined in @file{varasm.c}. These
4840functions should do jobs analogous to those of @code{text_section} and
4841@code{data_section}, for your additional sections. Do not define this
4842macro if you do not define @code{EXTRA_SECTIONS}.
4843
4844@findex READONLY_DATA_SECTION
4845@item READONLY_DATA_SECTION
4846On most machines, read-only variables, constants, and jump tables are
4847placed in the text section. If this is not the case on your machine,
4848this macro should be defined to be the name of a function (either
4849@code{data_section} or a function defined in @code{EXTRA_SECTIONS}) that
4850switches to the section to be used for read-only items.
4851
4852If these items should be placed in the text section, this macro should
4853not be defined.
4854
4855@findex SELECT_SECTION
4856@item SELECT_SECTION (@var{exp}, @var{reloc})
4857A C statement or statements to switch to the appropriate section for
4858output of @var{exp}. You can assume that @var{exp} is either a
4859@code{VAR_DECL} node or a constant of some sort. @var{reloc}
4860indicates whether the initial value of @var{exp} requires link-time
4861relocations. Select the section by calling @code{text_section} or one
4862of the alternatives for other sections.
4863
4864Do not define this macro if you put all read-only variables and
4865constants in the read-only data section (usually the text section).
4866
4867@findex SELECT_RTX_SECTION
4868@item SELECT_RTX_SECTION (@var{mode}, @var{rtx})
4869A C statement or statements to switch to the appropriate section for
4870output of @var{rtx} in mode @var{mode}. You can assume that @var{rtx}
4871is some kind of constant in RTL. The argument @var{mode} is redundant
4872except in the case of a @code{const_int} rtx. Select the section by
4873calling @code{text_section} or one of the alternatives for other
4874sections.
4875
4876Do not define this macro if you put all constants in the read-only
4877data section.
4878
4879@findex JUMP_TABLES_IN_TEXT_SECTION
4880@item JUMP_TABLES_IN_TEXT_SECTION
75197b37
BS
4881Define this macro to be an expression with a non-zero value if jump
4882tables (for @code{tablejump} insns) should be output in the text
4883section, along with the assembler instructions. Otherwise, the
4884readonly data section is used.
feca2ed3
JW
4885
4886This macro is irrelevant if there is no separate readonly data section.
4887
4888@findex ENCODE_SECTION_INFO
4889@item ENCODE_SECTION_INFO (@var{decl})
4890Define this macro if references to a symbol must be treated differently
4891depending on something about the variable or function named by the
4892symbol (such as what section it is in).
4893
4894The macro definition, if any, is executed immediately after the rtl for
4895@var{decl} has been created and stored in @code{DECL_RTL (@var{decl})}.
4896The value of the rtl will be a @code{mem} whose address is a
4897@code{symbol_ref}.
4898
4899@cindex @code{SYMBOL_REF_FLAG}, in @code{ENCODE_SECTION_INFO}
4900The usual thing for this macro to do is to record a flag in the
4901@code{symbol_ref} (such as @code{SYMBOL_REF_FLAG}) or to store a
4902modified name string in the @code{symbol_ref} (if one bit is not enough
4903information).
4904
4905@findex STRIP_NAME_ENCODING
4906@item STRIP_NAME_ENCODING (@var{var}, @var{sym_name})
4907Decode @var{sym_name} and store the real name part in @var{var}, sans
4908the characters that encode section info. Define this macro if
4909@code{ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} alters the symbol's name string.
4910
e9a25f70 4911@findex UNIQUE_SECTION_P
861bb6c1
JL
4912@item UNIQUE_SECTION_P (@var{decl})
4913A C expression which evaluates to true if @var{decl} should be placed
4914into a unique section for some target-specific reason. If you do not
4915define this macro, the default is @samp{0}. Note that the flag
4916@samp{-ffunction-sections} will also cause functions to be placed into
4917unique sections.
4918
feca2ed3 4919@findex UNIQUE_SECTION
861bb6c1
JL
4920@item UNIQUE_SECTION (@var{decl}, @var{reloc})
4921A C statement to build up a unique section name, expressed as a
4922STRING_CST node, and assign it to @samp{DECL_SECTION_NAME (@var{decl})}.
4923@var{reloc} indicates whether the initial value of @var{exp} requires
4924link-time relocations. If you do not define this macro, GNU CC will use
4925the symbol name prefixed by @samp{.} as the section name.
feca2ed3
JW
4926@end table
4927
4928@node PIC
4929@section Position Independent Code
4930@cindex position independent code
4931@cindex PIC
4932
4933This section describes macros that help implement generation of position
4934independent code. Simply defining these macros is not enough to
4935generate valid PIC; you must also add support to the macros
4936@code{GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS} and @code{PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS}, as
4937well as @code{LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS}. You must modify the definition of
4938@samp{movsi} to do something appropriate when the source operand
4939contains a symbolic address. You may also need to alter the handling of
4940switch statements so that they use relative addresses.
4941@c i rearranged the order of the macros above to try to force one of
4942@c them to the next line, to eliminate an overfull hbox. --mew 10feb93
4943
4944@table @code
4945@findex PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM
4946@item PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM
4947The register number of the register used to address a table of static
4948data addresses in memory. In some cases this register is defined by a
4949processor's ``application binary interface'' (ABI). When this macro
4950is defined, RTL is generated for this register once, as with the stack
4951pointer and frame pointer registers. If this macro is not defined, it
4952is up to the machine-dependent files to allocate such a register (if
4953necessary).
4954
4955@findex PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REG_CALL_CLOBBERED
4956@item PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REG_CALL_CLOBBERED
4957Define this macro if the register defined by
4958@code{PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM} is clobbered by calls. Do not define
ed4db1ee 4959this macro if @code{PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM} is not defined.
feca2ed3
JW
4960
4961@findex FINALIZE_PIC
4962@item FINALIZE_PIC
4963By generating position-independent code, when two different programs (A
4964and B) share a common library (libC.a), the text of the library can be
4965shared whether or not the library is linked at the same address for both
4966programs. In some of these environments, position-independent code
4967requires not only the use of different addressing modes, but also
4968special code to enable the use of these addressing modes.
4969
4970The @code{FINALIZE_PIC} macro serves as a hook to emit these special
4971codes once the function is being compiled into assembly code, but not
4972before. (It is not done before, because in the case of compiling an
4973inline function, it would lead to multiple PIC prologues being
4974included in functions which used inline functions and were compiled to
4975assembly language.)
4976
4977@findex LEGITIMATE_PIC_OPERAND_P
4978@item LEGITIMATE_PIC_OPERAND_P (@var{x})
4979A C expression that is nonzero if @var{x} is a legitimate immediate
4980operand on the target machine when generating position independent code.
4981You can assume that @var{x} satisfies @code{CONSTANT_P}, so you need not
4982check this. You can also assume @var{flag_pic} is true, so you need not
4983check it either. You need not define this macro if all constants
4984(including @code{SYMBOL_REF}) can be immediate operands when generating
4985position independent code.
4986@end table
4987
4988@node Assembler Format
4989@section Defining the Output Assembler Language
4990
4991This section describes macros whose principal purpose is to describe how
4992to write instructions in assembler language--rather than what the
4993instructions do.
4994
4995@menu
4996* File Framework:: Structural information for the assembler file.
4997* Data Output:: Output of constants (numbers, strings, addresses).
4998* Uninitialized Data:: Output of uninitialized variables.
4999* Label Output:: Output and generation of labels.
5000* Initialization:: General principles of initialization
5001 and termination routines.
5002* Macros for Initialization::
5003 Specific macros that control the handling of
5004 initialization and termination routines.
5005* Instruction Output:: Output of actual instructions.
5006* Dispatch Tables:: Output of jump tables.
5007* Exception Region Output:: Output of exception region code.
5008* Alignment Output:: Pseudo ops for alignment and skipping data.
5009@end menu
5010
5011@node File Framework
5012@subsection The Overall Framework of an Assembler File
5013@cindex assembler format
5014@cindex output of assembler code
5015
5016@c prevent bad page break with this line
5017This describes the overall framework of an assembler file.
5018
5019@table @code
5020@findex ASM_FILE_START
5021@item ASM_FILE_START (@var{stream})
5022A C expression which outputs to the stdio stream @var{stream}
5023some appropriate text to go at the start of an assembler file.
5024
5025Normally this macro is defined to output a line containing
5026@samp{#NO_APP}, which is a comment that has no effect on most
5027assemblers but tells the GNU assembler that it can save time by not
5028checking for certain assembler constructs.
5029
5030On systems that use SDB, it is necessary to output certain commands;
5031see @file{attasm.h}.
5032
5033@findex ASM_FILE_END
5034@item ASM_FILE_END (@var{stream})
5035A C expression which outputs to the stdio stream @var{stream}
5036some appropriate text to go at the end of an assembler file.
5037
5038If this macro is not defined, the default is to output nothing
5039special at the end of the file. Most systems don't require any
5040definition.
5041
5042On systems that use SDB, it is necessary to output certain commands;
5043see @file{attasm.h}.
5044
5045@findex ASM_IDENTIFY_GCC
5046@item ASM_IDENTIFY_GCC (@var{file})
5047A C statement to output assembler commands which will identify
5048the object file as having been compiled with GNU CC (or another
5049GNU compiler).
5050
5051If you don't define this macro, the string @samp{gcc_compiled.:}
5052is output. This string is calculated to define a symbol which,
5053on BSD systems, will never be defined for any other reason.
5054GDB checks for the presence of this symbol when reading the
5055symbol table of an executable.
5056
5057On non-BSD systems, you must arrange communication with GDB in
5058some other fashion. If GDB is not used on your system, you can
5059define this macro with an empty body.
5060
5061@findex ASM_COMMENT_START
5062@item ASM_COMMENT_START
5063A C string constant describing how to begin a comment in the target
5064assembler language. The compiler assumes that the comment will end at
5065the end of the line.
5066
5067@findex ASM_APP_ON
5068@item ASM_APP_ON
5069A C string constant for text to be output before each @code{asm}
5070statement or group of consecutive ones. Normally this is
5071@code{"#APP"}, which is a comment that has no effect on most
5072assemblers but tells the GNU assembler that it must check the lines
5073that follow for all valid assembler constructs.
5074
5075@findex ASM_APP_OFF
5076@item ASM_APP_OFF
5077A C string constant for text to be output after each @code{asm}
5078statement or group of consecutive ones. Normally this is
5079@code{"#NO_APP"}, which tells the GNU assembler to resume making the
5080time-saving assumptions that are valid for ordinary compiler output.
5081
5082@findex ASM_OUTPUT_SOURCE_FILENAME
5083@item ASM_OUTPUT_SOURCE_FILENAME (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5084A C statement to output COFF information or DWARF debugging information
5085which indicates that filename @var{name} is the current source file to
5086the stdio stream @var{stream}.
5087
5088This macro need not be defined if the standard form of output
5089for the file format in use is appropriate.
5090
e9a25f70
JL
5091@findex OUTPUT_QUOTED_STRING
5092@item OUTPUT_QUOTED_STRING (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5093A C statement to output the string @var{string} to the stdio stream
5094@var{stream}. If you do not call the function @code{output_quoted_string}
5095in your config files, GNU CC will only call it to output filenames to
5096the assembler source. So you can use it to canonicalize the format
5097of the filename using this macro.
5098
feca2ed3
JW
5099@findex ASM_OUTPUT_SOURCE_LINE
5100@item ASM_OUTPUT_SOURCE_LINE (@var{stream}, @var{line})
5101A C statement to output DBX or SDB debugging information before code
5102for line number @var{line} of the current source file to the
5103stdio stream @var{stream}.
5104
5105This macro need not be defined if the standard form of debugging
5106information for the debugger in use is appropriate.
5107
5108@findex ASM_OUTPUT_IDENT
5109@item ASM_OUTPUT_IDENT (@var{stream}, @var{string})
5110A C statement to output something to the assembler file to handle a
5111@samp{#ident} directive containing the text @var{string}. If this
5112macro is not defined, nothing is output for a @samp{#ident} directive.
5113
5114@findex ASM_OUTPUT_SECTION_NAME
861bb6c1 5115@item ASM_OUTPUT_SECTION_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{reloc})
feca2ed3
JW
5116A C statement to output something to the assembler file to switch to section
5117@var{name} for object @var{decl} which is either a @code{FUNCTION_DECL}, a
861bb6c1
JL
5118@code{VAR_DECL} or @code{NULL_TREE}. @var{reloc}
5119indicates whether the initial value of @var{exp} requires link-time
5120relocations. Some target formats do not support
feca2ed3
JW
5121arbitrary sections. Do not define this macro in such cases.
5122
5123At present this macro is only used to support section attributes.
5124When this macro is undefined, section attributes are disabled.
5125
5126@findex OBJC_PROLOGUE
5127@item OBJC_PROLOGUE
5128A C statement to output any assembler statements which are required to
5129precede any Objective C object definitions or message sending. The
5130statement is executed only when compiling an Objective C program.
5131@end table
5132
5133@need 2000
5134@node Data Output
5135@subsection Output of Data
5136
5137@c prevent bad page break with this line
5138This describes data output.
5139
5140@table @code
5141@findex ASM_OUTPUT_LONG_DOUBLE
5142@findex ASM_OUTPUT_DOUBLE
5143@findex ASM_OUTPUT_FLOAT
5144@item ASM_OUTPUT_LONG_DOUBLE (@var{stream}, @var{value})
5145@itemx ASM_OUTPUT_DOUBLE (@var{stream}, @var{value})
5146@itemx ASM_OUTPUT_FLOAT (@var{stream}, @var{value})
5147@itemx ASM_OUTPUT_THREE_QUARTER_FLOAT (@var{stream}, @var{value})
5148@itemx ASM_OUTPUT_SHORT_FLOAT (@var{stream}, @var{value})
5149@itemx ASM_OUTPUT_BYTE_FLOAT (@var{stream}, @var{value})
5150A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
5151instruction to assemble a floating-point constant of @code{TFmode},
5152@code{DFmode}, @code{SFmode}, @code{TQFmode}, @code{HFmode}, or
5153@code{QFmode}, respectively, whose value is @var{value}. @var{value}
5154will be a C expression of type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}. Macros such as
5155@code{REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DOUBLE} are useful for writing these
5156definitions.
5157
5158@findex ASM_OUTPUT_QUADRUPLE_INT
5159@findex ASM_OUTPUT_DOUBLE_INT
5160@findex ASM_OUTPUT_INT
5161@findex ASM_OUTPUT_SHORT
5162@findex ASM_OUTPUT_CHAR
5163@findex output_addr_const
5164@item ASM_OUTPUT_QUADRUPLE_INT (@var{stream}, @var{exp})
5165@itemx ASM_OUTPUT_DOUBLE_INT (@var{stream}, @var{exp})
5166@itemx ASM_OUTPUT_INT (@var{stream}, @var{exp})
5167@itemx ASM_OUTPUT_SHORT (@var{stream}, @var{exp})
5168@itemx ASM_OUTPUT_CHAR (@var{stream}, @var{exp})
5169A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
5170instruction to assemble an integer of 16, 8, 4, 2 or 1 bytes,
5171respectively, whose value is @var{value}. The argument @var{exp} will
5172be an RTL expression which represents a constant value. Use
5173@samp{output_addr_const (@var{stream}, @var{exp})} to output this value
5174as an assembler expression.@refill
5175
5176For sizes larger than @code{UNITS_PER_WORD}, if the action of a macro
5177would be identical to repeatedly calling the macro corresponding to
5178a size of @code{UNITS_PER_WORD}, once for each word, you need not define
5179the macro.
5180
5181@findex ASM_OUTPUT_BYTE
5182@item ASM_OUTPUT_BYTE (@var{stream}, @var{value})
5183A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
5184instruction to assemble a single byte containing the number @var{value}.
5185
5186@findex ASM_BYTE_OP
5187@item ASM_BYTE_OP
5188A C string constant giving the pseudo-op to use for a sequence of
5189single-byte constants. If this macro is not defined, the default is
5190@code{"byte"}.
5191
5192@findex ASM_OUTPUT_ASCII
5193@item ASM_OUTPUT_ASCII (@var{stream}, @var{ptr}, @var{len})
5194A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
5195instruction to assemble a string constant containing the @var{len}
5196bytes at @var{ptr}. @var{ptr} will be a C expression of type
5197@code{char *} and @var{len} a C expression of type @code{int}.
5198
5199If the assembler has a @code{.ascii} pseudo-op as found in the
5200Berkeley Unix assembler, do not define the macro
5201@code{ASM_OUTPUT_ASCII}.
5202
861bb6c1
JL
5203@findex CONSTANT_POOL_BEFORE_FUNCTION
5204@item CONSTANT_POOL_BEFORE_FUNCTION
5205You may define this macro as a C expression. You should define the
5206expression to have a non-zero value if GNU CC should output the constant
5207pool for a function before the code for the function, or a zero value if
5208GNU CC should output the constant pool after the function. If you do
5209not define this macro, the usual case, GNU CC will output the constant
5210pool before the function.
5211
feca2ed3
JW
5212@findex ASM_OUTPUT_POOL_PROLOGUE
5213@item ASM_OUTPUT_POOL_PROLOGUE (@var{file} @var{funname} @var{fundecl} @var{size})
5214A C statement to output assembler commands to define the start of the
5215constant pool for a function. @var{funname} is a string giving
5216the name of the function. Should the return type of the function
5217be required, it can be obtained via @var{fundecl}. @var{size}
5218is the size, in bytes, of the constant pool that will be written
5219immediately after this call.
5220
5221If no constant-pool prefix is required, the usual case, this macro need
5222not be defined.
5223
5224@findex ASM_OUTPUT_SPECIAL_POOL_ENTRY
5225@item ASM_OUTPUT_SPECIAL_POOL_ENTRY (@var{file}, @var{x}, @var{mode}, @var{align}, @var{labelno}, @var{jumpto})
5226A C statement (with or without semicolon) to output a constant in the
5227constant pool, if it needs special treatment. (This macro need not do
5228anything for RTL expressions that can be output normally.)
5229
5230The argument @var{file} is the standard I/O stream to output the
5231assembler code on. @var{x} is the RTL expression for the constant to
5232output, and @var{mode} is the machine mode (in case @var{x} is a
5233@samp{const_int}). @var{align} is the required alignment for the value
5234@var{x}; you should output an assembler directive to force this much
5235alignment.
5236
5237The argument @var{labelno} is a number to use in an internal label for
5238the address of this pool entry. The definition of this macro is
5239responsible for outputting the label definition at the proper place.
5240Here is how to do this:
5241
5242@example
5243ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{file}, "LC", @var{labelno});
5244@end example
5245
5246When you output a pool entry specially, you should end with a
5247@code{goto} to the label @var{jumpto}. This will prevent the same pool
5248entry from being output a second time in the usual manner.
5249
5250You need not define this macro if it would do nothing.
5251
861bb6c1
JL
5252@findex CONSTANT_AFTER_FUNCTION_P
5253@item CONSTANT_AFTER_FUNCTION_P (@var{exp})
5254Define this macro as a C expression which is nonzero if the constant
5255@var{exp}, of type @code{tree}, should be output after the code for a
5256function. The compiler will normally output all constants before the
5257function; you need not define this macro if this is OK.
5258
5259@findex ASM_OUTPUT_POOL_EPILOGUE
5260@item ASM_OUTPUT_POOL_EPILOGUE (@var{file} @var{funname} @var{fundecl} @var{size})
5261A C statement to output assembler commands to at the end of the constant
5262pool for a function. @var{funname} is a string giving the name of the
5263function. Should the return type of the function be required, you can
5264obtain it via @var{fundecl}. @var{size} is the size, in bytes, of the
5265constant pool that GNU CC wrote immediately before this call.
5266
5267If no constant-pool epilogue is required, the usual case, you need not
5268define this macro.
5269
feca2ed3
JW
5270@findex IS_ASM_LOGICAL_LINE_SEPARATOR
5271@item IS_ASM_LOGICAL_LINE_SEPARATOR (@var{C})
5272Define this macro as a C expression which is nonzero if @var{C} is
5273used as a logical line separator by the assembler.
5274
5275If you do not define this macro, the default is that only
5276the character @samp{;} is treated as a logical line separator.
5277
5278
5279@findex ASM_OPEN_PAREN
5280@findex ASM_CLOSE_PAREN
5281@item ASM_OPEN_PAREN
5282@itemx ASM_CLOSE_PAREN
5283These macros are defined as C string constant, describing the syntax
5284in the assembler for grouping arithmetic expressions. The following
5285definitions are correct for most assemblers:
5286
5287@example
5288#define ASM_OPEN_PAREN "("
5289#define ASM_CLOSE_PAREN ")"
5290@end example
5291@end table
5292
5293 These macros are provided by @file{real.h} for writing the definitions
5294of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DOUBLE} and the like:
5295
5296@table @code
5297@item REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_SINGLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
5298@itemx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DOUBLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
5299@itemx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_LONG_DOUBLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
5300@findex REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_SINGLE
5301@findex REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DOUBLE
5302@findex REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_LONG_DOUBLE
5303These translate @var{x}, of type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}, to the target's
5304floating point representation, and store its bit pattern in the array of
5305@code{long int} whose address is @var{l}. The number of elements in the
5306output array is determined by the size of the desired target floating
5307point data type: 32 bits of it go in each @code{long int} array
5308element. Each array element holds 32 bits of the result, even if
5309@code{long int} is wider than 32 bits on the host machine.
5310
5311The array element values are designed so that you can print them out
5312using @code{fprintf} in the order they should appear in the target
5313machine's memory.
5314
5315@item REAL_VALUE_TO_DECIMAL (@var{x}, @var{format}, @var{string})
5316@findex REAL_VALUE_TO_DECIMAL
5317This macro converts @var{x}, of type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}, to a
5318decimal number and stores it as a string into @var{string}.
5319You must pass, as @var{string}, the address of a long enough block
5320of space to hold the result.
5321
5322The argument @var{format} is a @code{printf}-specification that serves
5323as a suggestion for how to format the output string.
5324@end table
5325
5326@node Uninitialized Data
5327@subsection Output of Uninitialized Variables
5328
5329Each of the macros in this section is used to do the whole job of
5330outputting a single uninitialized variable.
5331
5332@table @code
5333@findex ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON
5334@item ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5335A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5336@var{stream} the assembler definition of a common-label named
5337@var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes. The variable @var{rounded}
5338is the size rounded up to whatever alignment the caller wants.
5339
5340Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5341output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5342assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline.
5343
5344This macro controls how the assembler definitions of uninitialized
5345common global variables are output.
5346
5347@findex ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON
5348@item ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5349Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} except takes the required alignment as a
5350separate, explicit argument. If you define this macro, it is used in
5351place of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON}, and gives you more flexibility in
5352handling the required alignment of the variable. The alignment is specified
5353as the number of bits.
5354
e9a25f70
JL
5355@findex ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_COMMON
5356@item ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5357Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON} except that @var{decl} of the
5358variable to be output, if there is one, or @code{NULL_TREE} if there
5359is not corresponding variable. If you define this macro, GNU CC wil use it
5360in place of both @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} and
5361@code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON}. Define this macro when you need to see
5362the variable's decl in order to chose what to output.
5363
feca2ed3
JW
5364@findex ASM_OUTPUT_SHARED_COMMON
5365@item ASM_OUTPUT_SHARED_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5366If defined, it is similar to @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON}, except that it
5367is used when @var{name} is shared. If not defined, @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON}
5368will be used.
5369
5370@findex ASM_OUTPUT_BSS
5371@item ASM_OUTPUT_BSS (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5372A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5373@var{stream} the assembler definition of uninitialized global @var{decl} named
5374@var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes. The variable @var{rounded}
5375is the size rounded up to whatever alignment the caller wants.
5376
5377Try to use function @code{asm_output_bss} defined in @file{varasm.c} when
5378defining this macro. If unable, use the expression
5379@code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to output the name itself;
5380before and after that, output the additional assembler syntax for defining
5381the name, and a newline.
5382
5383This macro controls how the assembler definitions of uninitialized global
5384variables are output. This macro exists to properly support languages like
5385@code{c++} which do not have @code{common} data. However, this macro currently
5386is not defined for all targets. If this macro and
5387@code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_BSS} are not defined then @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON}
e9a25f70
JL
5388or @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON} or
5389@code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_COMMON} is used.
feca2ed3
JW
5390
5391@findex ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_BSS
5392@item ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_BSS (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5393Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_BSS} except takes the required alignment as a
5394separate, explicit argument. If you define this macro, it is used in
5395place of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_BSS}, and gives you more flexibility in
5396handling the required alignment of the variable. The alignment is specified
5397as the number of bits.
5398
5399Try to use function @code{asm_output_aligned_bss} defined in file
5400@file{varasm.c} when defining this macro.
5401
5402@findex ASM_OUTPUT_SHARED_BSS
5403@item ASM_OUTPUT_SHARED_BSS (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5404If defined, it is similar to @code{ASM_OUTPUT_BSS}, except that it
5405is used when @var{name} is shared. If not defined, @code{ASM_OUTPUT_BSS}
5406will be used.
5407
5408@findex ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL
5409@item ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5410A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5411@var{stream} the assembler definition of a local-common-label named
5412@var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes. The variable @var{rounded}
5413is the size rounded up to whatever alignment the caller wants.
5414
5415Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5416output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5417assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline.
5418
5419This macro controls how the assembler definitions of uninitialized
5420static variables are output.
5421
5422@findex ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_LOCAL
5423@item ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5424Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL} except takes the required alignment as a
5425separate, explicit argument. If you define this macro, it is used in
5426place of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL}, and gives you more flexibility in
5427handling the required alignment of the variable. The alignment is specified
5428as the number of bits.
5429
e9a25f70
JL
5430@findex ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_LOCAL
5431@item ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5432Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL} except that @var{decl} of the
5433variable to be output, if there is one, or @code{NULL_TREE} if there
5434is not corresponding variable. If you define this macro, GNU CC wil use it
5435in place of both @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DECL} and
5436@code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL}. Define this macro when you need to see
5437the variable's decl in order to chose what to output.
5438
5439
feca2ed3
JW
5440@findex ASM_OUTPUT_SHARED_LOCAL
5441@item ASM_OUTPUT_SHARED_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5442If defined, it is similar to @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL}, except that it
5443is used when @var{name} is shared. If not defined, @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL}
5444will be used.
5445@end table
5446
5447@node Label Output
5448@subsection Output and Generation of Labels
5449
5450@c prevent bad page break with this line
5451This is about outputting labels.
5452
5453@table @code
5454@findex ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL
5455@findex assemble_name
5456@item ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5457A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5458@var{stream} the assembler definition of a label named @var{name}.
5459Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5460output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5461assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline.
5462
5463@findex ASM_DECLARE_FUNCTION_NAME
5464@item ASM_DECLARE_FUNCTION_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5465A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5466@var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name @var{name} of a
5467function which is being defined. This macro is responsible for
5468outputting the label definition (perhaps using
5469@code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}). The argument @var{decl} is the
5470@code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node representing the function.
5471
5472If this macro is not defined, then the function name is defined in the
5473usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}).
5474
5475@findex ASM_DECLARE_FUNCTION_SIZE
5476@item ASM_DECLARE_FUNCTION_SIZE (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5477A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5478@var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the size of a function
5479which is being defined. The argument @var{name} is the name of the
5480function. The argument @var{decl} is the @code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node
5481representing the function.
5482
5483If this macro is not defined, then the function size is not defined.
5484
5485@findex ASM_DECLARE_OBJECT_NAME
5486@item ASM_DECLARE_OBJECT_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5487A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5488@var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name @var{name} of an
5489initialized variable which is being defined. This macro must output the
5490label definition (perhaps using @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}). The argument
5491@var{decl} is the @code{VAR_DECL} tree node representing the variable.
5492
5493If this macro is not defined, then the variable name is defined in the
5494usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}).
5495
5496@findex ASM_FINISH_DECLARE_OBJECT
5497@item ASM_FINISH_DECLARE_OBJECT (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{toplevel}, @var{atend})
5498A C statement (sans semicolon) to finish up declaring a variable name
5499once the compiler has processed its initializer fully and thus has had a
5500chance to determine the size of an array when controlled by an
5501initializer. This is used on systems where it's necessary to declare
5502something about the size of the object.
5503
5504If you don't define this macro, that is equivalent to defining it to do
5505nothing.
5506
5507@findex ASM_GLOBALIZE_LABEL
5508@item ASM_GLOBALIZE_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5509A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5510@var{stream} some commands that will make the label @var{name} global;
5511that is, available for reference from other files. Use the expression
5512@code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to output the name
5513itself; before and after that, output the additional assembler syntax
5514for making that name global, and a newline.
5515
5516@findex ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL
5517@item ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL
5518A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5519@var{stream} some commands that will make the label @var{name} weak;
5520that is, available for reference from other files but only used if
5521no other definition is available. Use the expression
5522@code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to output the name
5523itself; before and after that, output the additional assembler syntax
5524for making that name weak, and a newline.
5525
5526If you don't define this macro, GNU CC will not support weak
5527symbols and you should not define the @code{SUPPORTS_WEAK} macro.
5528
5529@findex SUPPORTS_WEAK
5530@item SUPPORTS_WEAK
5531A C expression which evaluates to true if the target supports weak symbols.
5532
5533If you don't define this macro, @file{defaults.h} provides a default
5534definition. If @code{ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL} is defined, the default
5535definition is @samp{1}; otherwise, it is @samp{0}. Define this macro if
5536you want to control weak symbol support with a compiler flag such as
5537@samp{-melf}.
5538
5539@findex MAKE_DECL_ONE_ONLY (@var{decl})
5540@item MAKE_DECL_ONE_ONLY
5541A C statement (sans semicolon) to mark @var{decl} to be emitted as a
5542public symbol such that extra copies in multiple translation units will
5543be discarded by the linker. Define this macro if your object file
5544format provides support for this concept, such as the @samp{COMDAT}
5545section flags in the Microsoft Windows PE/COFF format, and this support
5546requires changes to @var{decl}, such as putting it in a separate section.
5547
e9a25f70
JL
5548@findex SUPPORTS_ONE_ONLY
5549@item SUPPORTS_ONE_ONLY
feca2ed3
JW
5550A C expression which evaluates to true if the target supports one-only
5551semantics.
5552
5553If you don't define this macro, @file{varasm.c} provides a default
5554definition. If @code{MAKE_DECL_ONE_ONLY} is defined, the default
5555definition is @samp{1}; otherwise, it is @samp{0}. Define this macro if
e9a25f70 5556you want to control one-only symbol support with a compiler flag, or if
feca2ed3
JW
5557setting the @code{DECL_ONE_ONLY} flag is enough to mark a declaration to
5558be emitted as one-only.
5559
5560@findex ASM_OUTPUT_EXTERNAL
5561@item ASM_OUTPUT_EXTERNAL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name})
5562A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5563@var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name of an external
5564symbol named @var{name} which is referenced in this compilation but
5565not defined. The value of @var{decl} is the tree node for the
5566declaration.
5567
5568This macro need not be defined if it does not need to output anything.
5569The GNU assembler and most Unix assemblers don't require anything.
5570
5571@findex ASM_OUTPUT_EXTERNAL_LIBCALL
5572@item ASM_OUTPUT_EXTERNAL_LIBCALL (@var{stream}, @var{symref})
5573A C statement (sans semicolon) to output on @var{stream} an assembler
5574pseudo-op to declare a library function name external. The name of the
5575library function is given by @var{symref}, which has type @code{rtx} and
5576is a @code{symbol_ref}.
5577
5578This macro need not be defined if it does not need to output anything.
5579The GNU assembler and most Unix assemblers don't require anything.
5580
5581@findex ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF
5582@item ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5583A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5584@var{stream} a reference in assembler syntax to a label named
5585@var{name}. This should add @samp{_} to the front of the name, if that
5586is customary on your operating system, as it is in most Berkeley Unix
5587systems. This macro is used in @code{assemble_name}.
5588
5589@ignore @c Seems not to exist anymore.
5590@findex ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF_AS_INT
5591@item ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF_AS_INT (@var{file}, @var{label})
5592Define this macro for systems that use the program @code{collect2}.
5593The definition should be a C statement to output a word containing
5594a reference to the label @var{label}.
5595@end ignore
5596
5597@findex ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL
5598@item ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{prefix}, @var{num})
5599A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} a label whose
5600name is made from the string @var{prefix} and the number @var{num}.
5601
5602It is absolutely essential that these labels be distinct from the labels
5603used for user-level functions and variables. Otherwise, certain programs
5604will have name conflicts with internal labels.
5605
5606It is desirable to exclude internal labels from the symbol table of the
5607object file. Most assemblers have a naming convention for labels that
5608should be excluded; on many systems, the letter @samp{L} at the
5609beginning of a label has this effect. You should find out what
5610convention your system uses, and follow it.
5611
5612The usual definition of this macro is as follows:
5613
5614@example
5615fprintf (@var{stream}, "L%s%d:\n", @var{prefix}, @var{num})
5616@end example
5617
5618@findex ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL
5619@item ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{string}, @var{prefix}, @var{num})
5620A C statement to store into the string @var{string} a label whose name
5621is made from the string @var{prefix} and the number @var{num}.
5622
5623This string, when output subsequently by @code{assemble_name}, should
5624produce the output that @code{ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL} would produce
5625with the same @var{prefix} and @var{num}.
5626
5627If the string begins with @samp{*}, then @code{assemble_name} will
5628output the rest of the string unchanged. It is often convenient for
5629@code{ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL} to use @samp{*} in this way. If the
5630string doesn't start with @samp{*}, then @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} gets
5631to output the string, and may change it. (Of course,
5632@code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} is also part of your machine description, so
5633you should know what it does on your machine.)
5634
5635@findex ASM_FORMAT_PRIVATE_NAME
5636@item ASM_FORMAT_PRIVATE_NAME (@var{outvar}, @var{name}, @var{number})
5637A C expression to assign to @var{outvar} (which is a variable of type
5638@code{char *}) a newly allocated string made from the string
5639@var{name} and the number @var{number}, with some suitable punctuation
5640added. Use @code{alloca} to get space for the string.
5641
5642The string will be used as an argument to @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} to
5643produce an assembler label for an internal static variable whose name is
5644@var{name}. Therefore, the string must be such as to result in valid
5645assembler code. The argument @var{number} is different each time this
5646macro is executed; it prevents conflicts between similarly-named
5647internal static variables in different scopes.
5648
5649Ideally this string should not be a valid C identifier, to prevent any
5650conflict with the user's own symbols. Most assemblers allow periods
5651or percent signs in assembler symbols; putting at least one of these
5652between the name and the number will suffice.
5653
5654@findex ASM_OUTPUT_DEF
5655@item ASM_OUTPUT_DEF (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5656A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5657which defines (equates) the symbol @var{name} to have the value @var{value}.
5658
5659If SET_ASM_OP is defined, a default definition is provided which is
5660correct for most systems.
810e3c45 5661
956d6950
JL
5662@findex ASM_OUTPUT_DEFINE_LABEL_DIFFERENCE_SYMBOL
5663@item ASM_OUTPUT_DEFINE_LABEL_DIFFERENCE_SYMBOL (@var{stream}, @var{symbol}, @var{high}, @var{low})
5664A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5665which defines (equates) the symbol @var{symbol} to have a value equal to
5666the difference of the two symbols @var{high} and @var{low}, i.e.
5667@var{high} minus @var{low}. GNU CC guarantees that the symbols @var{high}
5668and @var{low} are already known by the assembler so that the difference
5669resolves into a constant.
5670
5671If SET_ASM_OP is defined, a default definition is provided which is
5672correct for most systems.
5673
810e3c45
JM
5674@findex ASM_OUTPUT_WEAK_ALIAS
5675@item ASM_OUTPUT_WEAK_ALIAS (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5676A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5677which defines (equates) the weak symbol @var{name} to have the value
5678@var{value}.
5679
5680Define this macro if the target only supports weak aliases; define
5681ASM_OUTPUT_DEF instead if possible.
5682
feca2ed3
JW
5683@findex OBJC_GEN_METHOD_LABEL
5684@item OBJC_GEN_METHOD_LABEL (@var{buf}, @var{is_inst}, @var{class_name}, @var{cat_name}, @var{sel_name})
5685Define this macro to override the default assembler names used for
5686Objective C methods.
5687
5688The default name is a unique method number followed by the name of the
5689class (e.g.@: @samp{_1_Foo}). For methods in categories, the name of
5690the category is also included in the assembler name (e.g.@:
5691@samp{_1_Foo_Bar}).
5692
5693These names are safe on most systems, but make debugging difficult since
5694the method's selector is not present in the name. Therefore, particular
5695systems define other ways of computing names.
5696
5697@var{buf} is an expression of type @code{char *} which gives you a
5698buffer in which to store the name; its length is as long as
5699@var{class_name}, @var{cat_name} and @var{sel_name} put together, plus
570050 characters extra.
5701
5702The argument @var{is_inst} specifies whether the method is an instance
5703method or a class method; @var{class_name} is the name of the class;
5704@var{cat_name} is the name of the category (or NULL if the method is not
5705in a category); and @var{sel_name} is the name of the selector.
5706
5707On systems where the assembler can handle quoted names, you can use this
5708macro to provide more human-readable names.
5709@end table
5710
5711@node Initialization
5712@subsection How Initialization Functions Are Handled
5713@cindex initialization routines
5714@cindex termination routines
5715@cindex constructors, output of
5716@cindex destructors, output of
5717
5718The compiled code for certain languages includes @dfn{constructors}
5719(also called @dfn{initialization routines})---functions to initialize
5720data in the program when the program is started. These functions need
5721to be called before the program is ``started''---that is to say, before
5722@code{main} is called.
5723
5724Compiling some languages generates @dfn{destructors} (also called
5725@dfn{termination routines}) that should be called when the program
5726terminates.
5727
5728To make the initialization and termination functions work, the compiler
5729must output something in the assembler code to cause those functions to
5730be called at the appropriate time. When you port the compiler to a new
5731system, you need to specify how to do this.
5732
5733There are two major ways that GCC currently supports the execution of
5734initialization and termination functions. Each way has two variants.
5735Much of the structure is common to all four variations.
5736
5737@findex __CTOR_LIST__
5738@findex __DTOR_LIST__
5739The linker must build two lists of these functions---a list of
5740initialization functions, called @code{__CTOR_LIST__}, and a list of
5741termination functions, called @code{__DTOR_LIST__}.
5742
5743Each list always begins with an ignored function pointer (which may hold
57440, @minus{}1, or a count of the function pointers after it, depending on
5745the environment). This is followed by a series of zero or more function
5746pointers to constructors (or destructors), followed by a function
5747pointer containing zero.
5748
5749Depending on the operating system and its executable file format, either
5750@file{crtstuff.c} or @file{libgcc2.c} traverses these lists at startup
5751time and exit time. Constructors are called in reverse order of the
5752list; destructors in forward order.
5753
5754The best way to handle static constructors works only for object file
5755formats which provide arbitrarily-named sections. A section is set
5756aside for a list of constructors, and another for a list of destructors.
5757Traditionally these are called @samp{.ctors} and @samp{.dtors}. Each
5758object file that defines an initialization function also puts a word in
5759the constructor section to point to that function. The linker
5760accumulates all these words into one contiguous @samp{.ctors} section.
5761Termination functions are handled similarly.
5762
5763To use this method, you need appropriate definitions of the macros
5764@code{ASM_OUTPUT_CONSTRUCTOR} and @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DESTRUCTOR}. Usually
5765you can get them by including @file{svr4.h}.
5766
5767When arbitrary sections are available, there are two variants, depending
5768upon how the code in @file{crtstuff.c} is called. On systems that
5769support an @dfn{init} section which is executed at program startup,
5770parts of @file{crtstuff.c} are compiled into that section. The
5771program is linked by the @code{gcc} driver like this:
5772
5773@example
5774ld -o @var{output_file} crtbegin.o @dots{} crtend.o -lgcc
5775@end example
5776
5777The head of a function (@code{__do_global_ctors}) appears in the init
5778section of @file{crtbegin.o}; the remainder of the function appears in
5779the init section of @file{crtend.o}. The linker will pull these two
5780parts of the section together, making a whole function. If any of the
5781user's object files linked into the middle of it contribute code, then that
5782code will be executed as part of the body of @code{__do_global_ctors}.
5783
5784To use this variant, you must define the @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}
5785macro properly.
5786
5787If no init section is available, do not define
5788@code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}. Then @code{__do_global_ctors} is built into
5789the text section like all other functions, and resides in
5790@file{libgcc.a}. When GCC compiles any function called @code{main}, it
5791inserts a procedure call to @code{__main} as the first executable code
5792after the function prologue. The @code{__main} function, also defined
5793in @file{libgcc2.c}, simply calls @file{__do_global_ctors}.
5794
5795In file formats that don't support arbitrary sections, there are again
5796two variants. In the simplest variant, the GNU linker (GNU @code{ld})
5797and an `a.out' format must be used. In this case,
5798@code{ASM_OUTPUT_CONSTRUCTOR} is defined to produce a @code{.stabs}
5799entry of type @samp{N_SETT}, referencing the name @code{__CTOR_LIST__},
5800and with the address of the void function containing the initialization
5801code as its value. The GNU linker recognizes this as a request to add
5802the value to a ``set''; the values are accumulated, and are eventually
5803placed in the executable as a vector in the format described above, with
5804a leading (ignored) count and a trailing zero element.
5805@code{ASM_OUTPUT_DESTRUCTOR} is handled similarly. Since no init
5806section is available, the absence of @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP} causes
5807the compilation of @code{main} to call @code{__main} as above, starting
5808the initialization process.
5809
5810The last variant uses neither arbitrary sections nor the GNU linker.
5811This is preferable when you want to do dynamic linking and when using
5812file formats which the GNU linker does not support, such as `ECOFF'. In
5813this case, @code{ASM_OUTPUT_CONSTRUCTOR} does not produce an
5814@code{N_SETT} symbol; initialization and termination functions are
5815recognized simply by their names. This requires an extra program in the
5816linkage step, called @code{collect2}. This program pretends to be the
5817linker, for use with GNU CC; it does its job by running the ordinary
5818linker, but also arranges to include the vectors of initialization and
5819termination functions. These functions are called via @code{__main} as
5820described above.
5821
5822Choosing among these configuration options has been simplified by a set
5823of operating-system-dependent files in the @file{config} subdirectory.
5824These files define all of the relevant parameters. Usually it is
5825sufficient to include one into your specific machine-dependent
5826configuration file. These files are:
5827
5828@table @file
5829@item aoutos.h
5830For operating systems using the `a.out' format.
5831
5832@item next.h
5833For operating systems using the `MachO' format.
5834
5835@item svr3.h
5836For System V Release 3 and similar systems using `COFF' format.
5837
5838@item svr4.h
5839For System V Release 4 and similar systems using `ELF' format.
5840
5841@item vms.h
5842For the VMS operating system.
5843@end table
5844
5845@ifinfo
5846The following section describes the specific macros that control and
5847customize the handling of initialization and termination functions.
5848@end ifinfo
5849
5850@node Macros for Initialization
5851@subsection Macros Controlling Initialization Routines
5852
5853Here are the macros that control how the compiler handles initialization
5854and termination functions:
5855
5856@table @code
5857@findex INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP
5858@item INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP
5859If defined, a C string constant for the assembler operation to identify
5860the following data as initialization code. If not defined, GNU CC will
5861assume such a section does not exist. When you are using special
5862sections for initialization and termination functions, this macro also
5863controls how @file{crtstuff.c} and @file{libgcc2.c} arrange to run the
5864initialization functions.
5865
5866@item HAS_INIT_SECTION
5867@findex HAS_INIT_SECTION
5868If defined, @code{main} will not call @code{__main} as described above.
5869This macro should be defined for systems that control the contents of the
5870init section on a symbol-by-symbol basis, such as OSF/1, and should not
5871be defined explicitly for systems that support
5872@code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}.
5873
5874@item LD_INIT_SWITCH
5875@findex LD_INIT_SWITCH
5876If defined, a C string constant for a switch that tells the linker that
5877the following symbol is an initialization routine.
5878
5879@item LD_FINI_SWITCH
5880@findex LD_FINI_SWITCH
5881If defined, a C string constant for a switch that tells the linker that
5882the following symbol is a finalization routine.
5883
5884@item INVOKE__main
5885@findex INVOKE__main
5886If defined, @code{main} will call @code{__main} despite the presence of
5887@code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}. This macro should be defined for systems
5888where the init section is not actually run automatically, but is still
5889useful for collecting the lists of constructors and destructors.
5890
5891@item ASM_OUTPUT_CONSTRUCTOR (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5892@findex ASM_OUTPUT_CONSTRUCTOR
5893Define this macro as a C statement to output on the stream @var{stream}
5894the assembler code to arrange to call the function named @var{name} at
5895initialization time.
5896
5897Assume that @var{name} is the name of a C function generated
5898automatically by the compiler. This function takes no arguments. Use
5899the function @code{assemble_name} to output the name @var{name}; this
5900performs any system-specific syntactic transformations such as adding an
5901underscore.
5902
5903If you don't define this macro, nothing special is output to arrange to
5904call the function. This is correct when the function will be called in
5905some other manner---for example, by means of the @code{collect2} program,
5906which looks through the symbol table to find these functions by their
5907names.
5908
5909@item ASM_OUTPUT_DESTRUCTOR (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5910@findex ASM_OUTPUT_DESTRUCTOR
5911This is like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_CONSTRUCTOR} but used for termination
5912functions rather than initialization functions.
5913@end table
5914
5915If your system uses @code{collect2} as the means of processing
5916constructors, then that program normally uses @code{nm} to scan an
5917object file for constructor functions to be called. On certain kinds of
5918systems, you can define these macros to make @code{collect2} work faster
5919(and, in some cases, make it work at all):
5920
5921@table @code
5922@findex OBJECT_FORMAT_COFF
5923@item OBJECT_FORMAT_COFF
5924Define this macro if the system uses COFF (Common Object File Format)
5925object files, so that @code{collect2} can assume this format and scan
5926object files directly for dynamic constructor/destructor functions.
5927
5928@findex OBJECT_FORMAT_ROSE
5929@item OBJECT_FORMAT_ROSE
5930Define this macro if the system uses ROSE format object files, so that
5931@code{collect2} can assume this format and scan object files directly
5932for dynamic constructor/destructor functions.
5933
5934These macros are effective only in a native compiler; @code{collect2} as
5935part of a cross compiler always uses @code{nm} for the target machine.
5936
5937@findex REAL_NM_FILE_NAME
5938@item REAL_NM_FILE_NAME
5939Define this macro as a C string constant containing the file name to use
5940to execute @code{nm}. The default is to search the path normally for
5941@code{nm}.
5942
5943If your system supports shared libraries and has a program to list the
5944dynamic dependencies of a given library or executable, you can define
5945these macros to enable support for running initialization and
5946termination functions in shared libraries:
5947
5948@findex LDD_SUFFIX
5949@item LDD_SUFFIX
5950Define this macro to a C string constant containing the name of the
5951program which lists dynamic dependencies, like @code{"ldd"} under SunOS 4.
5952
5953@findex PARSE_LDD_OUTPUT
5954@item PARSE_LDD_OUTPUT (@var{PTR})
5955Define this macro to be C code that extracts filenames from the output
5956of the program denoted by @code{LDD_SUFFIX}. @var{PTR} is a variable
5957of type @code{char *} that points to the beginning of a line of output
5958from @code{LDD_SUFFIX}. If the line lists a dynamic dependency, the
5959code must advance @var{PTR} to the beginning of the filename on that
5960line. Otherwise, it must set @var{PTR} to @code{NULL}.
5961
5962@end table
5963
5964@node Instruction Output
5965@subsection Output of Assembler Instructions
5966
5967@c prevent bad page break with this line
5968This describes assembler instruction output.
5969
5970@table @code
5971@findex REGISTER_NAMES
5972@item REGISTER_NAMES
5973A C initializer containing the assembler's names for the machine
5974registers, each one as a C string constant. This is what translates
5975register numbers in the compiler into assembler language.
5976
5977@findex ADDITIONAL_REGISTER_NAMES
5978@item ADDITIONAL_REGISTER_NAMES
5979If defined, a C initializer for an array of structures containing a name
5980and a register number. This macro defines additional names for hard
5981registers, thus allowing the @code{asm} option in declarations to refer
5982to registers using alternate names.
5983
5984@findex ASM_OUTPUT_OPCODE
5985@item ASM_OUTPUT_OPCODE (@var{stream}, @var{ptr})
5986Define this macro if you are using an unusual assembler that
5987requires different names for the machine instructions.
5988
5989The definition is a C statement or statements which output an
5990assembler instruction opcode to the stdio stream @var{stream}. The
5991macro-operand @var{ptr} is a variable of type @code{char *} which
5992points to the opcode name in its ``internal'' form---the form that is
5993written in the machine description. The definition should output the
5994opcode name to @var{stream}, performing any translation you desire, and
5995increment the variable @var{ptr} to point at the end of the opcode
5996so that it will not be output twice.
5997
5998In fact, your macro definition may process less than the entire opcode
5999name, or more than the opcode name; but if you want to process text
6000that includes @samp{%}-sequences to substitute operands, you must take
6001care of the substitution yourself. Just be sure to increment
6002@var{ptr} over whatever text should not be output normally.
6003
6004@findex recog_operand
6005If you need to look at the operand values, they can be found as the
6006elements of @code{recog_operand}.
6007
6008If the macro definition does nothing, the instruction is output
6009in the usual way.
6010
6011@findex FINAL_PRESCAN_INSN
6012@item FINAL_PRESCAN_INSN (@var{insn}, @var{opvec}, @var{noperands})
6013If defined, a C statement to be executed just prior to the output of
6014assembler code for @var{insn}, to modify the extracted operands so
6015they will be output differently.
6016
6017Here the argument @var{opvec} is the vector containing the operands
6018extracted from @var{insn}, and @var{noperands} is the number of
6019elements of the vector which contain meaningful data for this insn.
6020The contents of this vector are what will be used to convert the insn
6021template into assembler code, so you can change the assembler output
6022by changing the contents of the vector.
6023
6024This macro is useful when various assembler syntaxes share a single
6025file of instruction patterns; by defining this macro differently, you
6026can cause a large class of instructions to be output differently (such
6027as with rearranged operands). Naturally, variations in assembler
6028syntax affecting individual insn patterns ought to be handled by
6029writing conditional output routines in those patterns.
6030
6031If this macro is not defined, it is equivalent to a null statement.
6032
6033@findex FINAL_PRESCAN_LABEL
6034@item FINAL_PRESCAN_LABEL
6035If defined, @code{FINAL_PRESCAN_INSN} will be called on each
6036@code{CODE_LABEL}. In that case, @var{opvec} will be a null pointer and
6037@var{noperands} will be zero.
6038
6039@findex PRINT_OPERAND
6040@item PRINT_OPERAND (@var{stream}, @var{x}, @var{code})
6041A C compound statement to output to stdio stream @var{stream} the
6042assembler syntax for an instruction operand @var{x}. @var{x} is an
6043RTL expression.
6044
6045@var{code} is a value that can be used to specify one of several ways
6046of printing the operand. It is used when identical operands must be
6047printed differently depending on the context. @var{code} comes from
6048the @samp{%} specification that was used to request printing of the
6049operand. If the specification was just @samp{%@var{digit}} then
6050@var{code} is 0; if the specification was @samp{%@var{ltr}
6051@var{digit}} then @var{code} is the ASCII code for @var{ltr}.
6052
6053@findex reg_names
6054If @var{x} is a register, this macro should print the register's name.
6055The names can be found in an array @code{reg_names} whose type is
6056@code{char *[]}. @code{reg_names} is initialized from
6057@code{REGISTER_NAMES}.
6058
6059When the machine description has a specification @samp{%@var{punct}}
6060(a @samp{%} followed by a punctuation character), this macro is called
6061with a null pointer for @var{x} and the punctuation character for
6062@var{code}.
6063
6064@findex PRINT_OPERAND_PUNCT_VALID_P
6065@item PRINT_OPERAND_PUNCT_VALID_P (@var{code})
6066A C expression which evaluates to true if @var{code} is a valid
6067punctuation character for use in the @code{PRINT_OPERAND} macro. If
6068@code{PRINT_OPERAND_PUNCT_VALID_P} is not defined, it means that no
6069punctuation characters (except for the standard one, @samp{%}) are used
6070in this way.
6071
6072@findex PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS
6073@item PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS (@var{stream}, @var{x})
6074A C compound statement to output to stdio stream @var{stream} the
6075assembler syntax for an instruction operand that is a memory reference
6076whose address is @var{x}. @var{x} is an RTL expression.
6077
6078@cindex @code{ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} usage
6079On some machines, the syntax for a symbolic address depends on the
6080section that the address refers to. On these machines, define the macro
6081@code{ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} to store the information into the
6082@code{symbol_ref}, and then check for it here. @xref{Assembler Format}.
6083
6084@findex DBR_OUTPUT_SEQEND
6085@findex dbr_sequence_length
6086@item DBR_OUTPUT_SEQEND(@var{file})
6087A C statement, to be executed after all slot-filler instructions have
6088been output. If necessary, call @code{dbr_sequence_length} to
6089determine the number of slots filled in a sequence (zero if not
6090currently outputting a sequence), to decide how many no-ops to output,
6091or whatever.
6092
6093Don't define this macro if it has nothing to do, but it is helpful in
6094reading assembly output if the extent of the delay sequence is made
6095explicit (e.g. with white space).
6096
6097@findex final_sequence
6098Note that output routines for instructions with delay slots must be
6099prepared to deal with not being output as part of a sequence (i.e.
6100when the scheduling pass is not run, or when no slot fillers could be
6101found.) The variable @code{final_sequence} is null when not
6102processing a sequence, otherwise it contains the @code{sequence} rtx
6103being output.
6104
6105@findex REGISTER_PREFIX
6106@findex LOCAL_LABEL_PREFIX
6107@findex USER_LABEL_PREFIX
6108@findex IMMEDIATE_PREFIX
6109@findex asm_fprintf
6110@item REGISTER_PREFIX
6111@itemx LOCAL_LABEL_PREFIX
6112@itemx USER_LABEL_PREFIX
6113@itemx IMMEDIATE_PREFIX
6114If defined, C string expressions to be used for the @samp{%R}, @samp{%L},
6115@samp{%U}, and @samp{%I} options of @code{asm_fprintf} (see
6116@file{final.c}). These are useful when a single @file{md} file must
6117support multiple assembler formats. In that case, the various @file{tm.h}
6118files can define these macros differently.
6119
6120@findex ASSEMBLER_DIALECT
6121@item ASSEMBLER_DIALECT
6122If your target supports multiple dialects of assembler language (such as
6123different opcodes), define this macro as a C expression that gives the
6124numeric index of the assembler language dialect to use, with zero as the
6125first variant.
6126
6127If this macro is defined, you may use constructs of the form
6128@samp{@{option0|option1|option2@dots{}@}} in the output
6129templates of patterns (@pxref{Output Template}) or in the first argument
6130of @code{asm_fprintf}. This construct outputs @samp{option0},
6131@samp{option1} or @samp{option2}, etc., if the value of
6132@code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT} is zero, one or two, etc. Any special
6133characters within these strings retain their usual meaning.
6134
6135If you do not define this macro, the characters @samp{@{}, @samp{|} and
6136@samp{@}} do not have any special meaning when used in templates or
6137operands to @code{asm_fprintf}.
6138
6139Define the macros @code{REGISTER_PREFIX}, @code{LOCAL_LABEL_PREFIX},
6140@code{USER_LABEL_PREFIX} and @code{IMMEDIATE_PREFIX} if you can express
e5e809f4 6141the variations in assembler language syntax with that mechanism. Define
feca2ed3
JW
6142@code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT} and use the @samp{@{option0|option1@}} syntax
6143if the syntax variant are larger and involve such things as different
6144opcodes or operand order.
6145
6146@findex ASM_OUTPUT_REG_PUSH
6147@item ASM_OUTPUT_REG_PUSH (@var{stream}, @var{regno})
6148A C expression to output to @var{stream} some assembler code
6149which will push hard register number @var{regno} onto the stack.
6150The code need not be optimal, since this macro is used only when
6151profiling.
6152
6153@findex ASM_OUTPUT_REG_POP
6154@item ASM_OUTPUT_REG_POP (@var{stream}, @var{regno})
6155A C expression to output to @var{stream} some assembler code
6156which will pop hard register number @var{regno} off of the stack.
6157The code need not be optimal, since this macro is used only when
6158profiling.
6159@end table
6160
6161@node Dispatch Tables
6162@subsection Output of Dispatch Tables
6163
6164@c prevent bad page break with this line
6165This concerns dispatch tables.
6166
6167@table @code
6168@cindex dispatch table
6169@findex ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_DIFF_ELT
33f7f353 6170@item ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_DIFF_ELT (@var{stream}, @var{body}, @var{value}, @var{rel})
feca2ed3
JW
6171A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6172pseudo-instruction to generate a difference between two labels.
6173@var{value} and @var{rel} are the numbers of two internal labels. The
6174definitions of these labels are output using
6175@code{ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL}, and they must be printed in the same
6176way here. For example,
6177
6178@example
6179fprintf (@var{stream}, "\t.word L%d-L%d\n",
6180 @var{value}, @var{rel})
6181@end example
6182
6183You must provide this macro on machines where the addresses in a
6184dispatch table are relative to the table's own address. If defined, GNU
6185CC will also use this macro on all machines when producing PIC.
33f7f353
JR
6186@var{body} is the body of the ADDR_DIFF_VEC; it is provided so that the
6187mode and flags can be read.
feca2ed3
JW
6188
6189@findex ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_ELT
6190@item ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_ELT (@var{stream}, @var{value})
6191This macro should be provided on machines where the addresses
6192in a dispatch table are absolute.
6193
6194The definition should be a C statement to output to the stdio stream
6195@var{stream} an assembler pseudo-instruction to generate a reference to
6196a label. @var{value} is the number of an internal label whose
6197definition is output using @code{ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL}.
6198For example,
6199
6200@example
6201fprintf (@var{stream}, "\t.word L%d\n", @var{value})
6202@end example
6203
6204@findex ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_LABEL
6205@item ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{prefix}, @var{num}, @var{table})
6206Define this if the label before a jump-table needs to be output
6207specially. The first three arguments are the same as for
6208@code{ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL}; the fourth argument is the
6209jump-table which follows (a @code{jump_insn} containing an
6210@code{addr_vec} or @code{addr_diff_vec}).
6211
6212This feature is used on system V to output a @code{swbeg} statement
6213for the table.
6214
6215If this macro is not defined, these labels are output with
6216@code{ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL}.
6217
6218@findex ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_END
6219@item ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_END (@var{stream}, @var{num}, @var{table})
6220Define this if something special must be output at the end of a
6221jump-table. The definition should be a C statement to be executed
6222after the assembler code for the table is written. It should write
6223the appropriate code to stdio stream @var{stream}. The argument
6224@var{table} is the jump-table insn, and @var{num} is the label-number
6225of the preceding label.
6226
6227If this macro is not defined, nothing special is output at the end of
6228the jump-table.
6229@end table
6230
6231@node Exception Region Output
6232@subsection Assembler Commands for Exception Regions
6233
6234@c prevent bad page break with this line
6235
6236This describes commands marking the start and the end of an exception
6237region.
6238
6239@table @code
6240@findex ASM_OUTPUT_EH_REGION_BEG
6241@item ASM_OUTPUT_EH_REGION_BEG ()
6242A C expression to output text to mark the start of an exception region.
6243
6244This macro need not be defined on most platforms.
6245
6246@findex ASM_OUTPUT_EH_REGION_END
6247@item ASM_OUTPUT_EH_REGION_END ()
6248A C expression to output text to mark the end of an exception region.
6249
6250This macro need not be defined on most platforms.
6251
0021b564
JM
6252@findex EXCEPTION_SECTION
6253@item EXCEPTION_SECTION ()
6254A C expression to switch to the section in which the main
6255exception table is to be placed (@pxref{Sections}). The default is a
6256section named @code{.gcc_except_table} on machines that support named
6257sections via @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SECTION_NAME}, otherwise if @samp{-fpic}
6258or @samp{-fPIC} is in effect, the @code{data_section}, otherwise the
6259@code{readonly_data_section}.
6260
6261@findex EH_FRAME_SECTION_ASM_OP
6262@item EH_FRAME_SECTION_ASM_OP
6263If defined, a C string constant for the assembler operation to switch to
6264the section for exception handling frame unwind information. If not
6265defined, GNU CC will provide a default definition if the target supports
6266named sections. @file{crtstuff.c} uses this macro to switch to the
6267appropriate section.
6268
6269You should define this symbol if your target supports DWARF 2 frame
6270unwind information and the default definition does not work.
6271
feca2ed3
JW
6272@findex OMIT_EH_TABLE
6273@item OMIT_EH_TABLE ()
6274A C expression that is nonzero if the normal exception table output
6275should be omitted.
6276
6277This macro need not be defined on most platforms.
6278
6279@findex EH_TABLE_LOOKUP
6280@item EH_TABLE_LOOKUP ()
6281Alternate runtime support for looking up an exception at runtime and
6282finding the associated handler, if the default method won't work.
6283
6284This macro need not be defined on most platforms.
6285
6286@findex DOESNT_NEED_UNWINDER
6287@item DOESNT_NEED_UNWINDER
6288A C expression that decides whether or not the current function needs to
6289have a function unwinder generated for it. See the file @code{except.c}
6290for details on when to define this, and how.
6291
6292@findex MASK_RETURN_ADDR
6293@item MASK_RETURN_ADDR
6294An rtx used to mask the return address found via RETURN_ADDR_RTX, so
6295that it does not contain any extraneous set bits in it.
0021b564
JM
6296
6297@findex DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO
6298@item DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO
6299Define this macro to 0 if your target supports DWARF 2 frame unwind
6300information, but it does not yet work with exception handling.
6301Otherwise, if your target supports this information (if it defines
6302@samp{INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX} and either @samp{UNALIGNED_INT_ASM_OP}
6303or @samp{OBJECT_FORMAT_ELF}), GCC will provide a default definition of
63041.
6305
6306If this macro is defined to 1, the DWARF 2 unwinder will be the default
6307exception handling mechanism; otherwise, setjmp/longjmp will be used by
6308default.
6309
6310If this macro is defined to anything, the DWARF 2 unwinder will be used
6311instead of inline unwinders and __unwind_function in the non-setjmp case.
6312
feca2ed3
JW
6313@end table
6314
6315@node Alignment Output
6316@subsection Assembler Commands for Alignment
6317
6318@c prevent bad page break with this line
6319This describes commands for alignment.
6320
6321@table @code
fc470718
R
6322@findex LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER
6323@item LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER (@var{label})
6324The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}, which follows
6325a BARRIER.
feca2ed3
JW
6326
6327This macro need not be defined if you don't want any special alignment
6328to be done at such a time. Most machine descriptions do not currently
6329define the macro.
6330
fc470718
R
6331@findex LOOP_ALIGN
6332@item LOOP_ALIGN (@var{label})
6333The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}, which follows
6334a NOTE_INSN_LOOP_BEG note.
feca2ed3
JW
6335
6336This macro need not be defined if you don't want any special alignment
6337to be done at such a time. Most machine descriptions do not currently
6338define the macro.
6339
fc470718
R
6340@findex LABEL_ALIGN
6341@item LABEL_ALIGN (@var{label})
6342The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}.
6343If LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER / LOOP_ALIGN specify a different alignment,
6344the maximum of the specified values is used.
6345
feca2ed3
JW
6346@findex ASM_OUTPUT_SKIP
6347@item ASM_OUTPUT_SKIP (@var{stream}, @var{nbytes})
6348A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6349instruction to advance the location counter by @var{nbytes} bytes.
6350Those bytes should be zero when loaded. @var{nbytes} will be a C
6351expression of type @code{int}.
6352
6353@findex ASM_NO_SKIP_IN_TEXT
6354@item ASM_NO_SKIP_IN_TEXT
6355Define this macro if @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SKIP} should not be used in the
556e0f21 6356text section because it fails to put zeros in the bytes that are skipped.
feca2ed3
JW
6357This is true on many Unix systems, where the pseudo--op to skip bytes
6358produces no-op instructions rather than zeros when used in the text
6359section.
6360
6361@findex ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN
6362@item ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN (@var{stream}, @var{power})
6363A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6364command to advance the location counter to a multiple of 2 to the
6365@var{power} bytes. @var{power} will be a C expression of type @code{int}.
6366@end table
6367
6368@need 3000
6369@node Debugging Info
6370@section Controlling Debugging Information Format
6371
6372@c prevent bad page break with this line
6373This describes how to specify debugging information.
6374
6375@menu
6376* All Debuggers:: Macros that affect all debugging formats uniformly.
6377* DBX Options:: Macros enabling specific options in DBX format.
6378* DBX Hooks:: Hook macros for varying DBX format.
6379* File Names and DBX:: Macros controlling output of file names in DBX format.
6380* SDB and DWARF:: Macros for SDB (COFF) and DWARF formats.
6381@end menu
6382
6383@node All Debuggers
6384@subsection Macros Affecting All Debugging Formats
6385
6386@c prevent bad page break with this line
6387These macros affect all debugging formats.
6388
6389@table @code
6390@findex DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER
6391@item DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER (@var{regno})
6392A C expression that returns the DBX register number for the compiler
6393register number @var{regno}. In simple cases, the value of this
6394expression may be @var{regno} itself. But sometimes there are some
6395registers that the compiler knows about and DBX does not, or vice
6396versa. In such cases, some register may need to have one number in
6397the compiler and another for DBX.
6398
6399If two registers have consecutive numbers inside GNU CC, and they can be
6400used as a pair to hold a multiword value, then they @emph{must} have
6401consecutive numbers after renumbering with @code{DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER}.
6402Otherwise, debuggers will be unable to access such a pair, because they
6403expect register pairs to be consecutive in their own numbering scheme.
6404
6405If you find yourself defining @code{DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER} in way that
6406does not preserve register pairs, then what you must do instead is
6407redefine the actual register numbering scheme.
6408
6409@findex DEBUGGER_AUTO_OFFSET
6410@item DEBUGGER_AUTO_OFFSET (@var{x})
6411A C expression that returns the integer offset value for an automatic
6412variable having address @var{x} (an RTL expression). The default
6413computation assumes that @var{x} is based on the frame-pointer and
6414gives the offset from the frame-pointer. This is required for targets
6415that produce debugging output for DBX or COFF-style debugging output
6416for SDB and allow the frame-pointer to be eliminated when the
6417@samp{-g} options is used.
6418
6419@findex DEBUGGER_ARG_OFFSET
6420@item DEBUGGER_ARG_OFFSET (@var{offset}, @var{x})
6421A C expression that returns the integer offset value for an argument
6422having address @var{x} (an RTL expression). The nominal offset is
6423@var{offset}.
6424
6425@findex PREFERRED_DEBUGGING_TYPE
6426@item PREFERRED_DEBUGGING_TYPE
e5e809f4
JL
6427A C expression that returns the type of debugging output GNU CC should
6428produce when the user specifies just @samp{-g}. Define
6429this if you have arranged for GNU CC to support more than one format of
6430debugging output. Currently, the allowable values are @code{DBX_DEBUG},
f3ff3f4a
JM
6431@code{SDB_DEBUG}, @code{DWARF_DEBUG}, @code{DWARF2_DEBUG}, and
6432@code{XCOFF_DEBUG}.
feca2ed3 6433
e5e809f4
JL
6434When the user specifies @samp{-ggdb}, GNU CC normally also uses the
6435value of this macro to select the debugging output format, but with two
6436exceptions. If @code{DWARF2_DEBUGGING_INFO} is defined and
6437@code{LINKER_DOES_NOT_WORK_WITH_DWARF2} is not defined, GNU CC uses the
6438value @code{DWARF2_DEBUG}. Otherwise, if @code{DBX_DEBUGGING_INFO} is
6439defined, GNU CC uses @code{DBX_DEBUG}.
deabc777 6440
feca2ed3
JW
6441The value of this macro only affects the default debugging output; the
6442user can always get a specific type of output by using @samp{-gstabs},
f3ff3f4a 6443@samp{-gcoff}, @samp{-gdwarf-1}, @samp{-gdwarf-2}, or @samp{-gxcoff}.
feca2ed3
JW
6444@end table
6445
6446@node DBX Options
6447@subsection Specific Options for DBX Output
6448
6449@c prevent bad page break with this line
6450These are specific options for DBX output.
6451
6452@table @code
6453@findex DBX_DEBUGGING_INFO
6454@item DBX_DEBUGGING_INFO
6455Define this macro if GNU CC should produce debugging output for DBX
6456in response to the @samp{-g} option.
6457
6458@findex XCOFF_DEBUGGING_INFO
6459@item XCOFF_DEBUGGING_INFO
6460Define this macro if GNU CC should produce XCOFF format debugging output
6461in response to the @samp{-g} option. This is a variant of DBX format.
6462
6463@findex DEFAULT_GDB_EXTENSIONS
6464@item DEFAULT_GDB_EXTENSIONS
6465Define this macro to control whether GNU CC should by default generate
6466GDB's extended version of DBX debugging information (assuming DBX-format
6467debugging information is enabled at all). If you don't define the
6468macro, the default is 1: always generate the extended information
6469if there is any occasion to.
6470
6471@findex DEBUG_SYMS_TEXT
6472@item DEBUG_SYMS_TEXT
6473Define this macro if all @code{.stabs} commands should be output while
6474in the text section.
6475
6476@findex ASM_STABS_OP
6477@item ASM_STABS_OP
6478A C string constant naming the assembler pseudo op to use instead of
6479@code{.stabs} to define an ordinary debugging symbol. If you don't
6480define this macro, @code{.stabs} is used. This macro applies only to
6481DBX debugging information format.
6482
6483@findex ASM_STABD_OP
6484@item ASM_STABD_OP
6485A C string constant naming the assembler pseudo op to use instead of
6486@code{.stabd} to define a debugging symbol whose value is the current
6487location. If you don't define this macro, @code{.stabd} is used.
6488This macro applies only to DBX debugging information format.
6489
6490@findex ASM_STABN_OP
6491@item ASM_STABN_OP
6492A C string constant naming the assembler pseudo op to use instead of
6493@code{.stabn} to define a debugging symbol with no name. If you don't
6494define this macro, @code{.stabn} is used. This macro applies only to
6495DBX debugging information format.
6496
6497@findex DBX_NO_XREFS
6498@item DBX_NO_XREFS
6499Define this macro if DBX on your system does not support the construct
6500@samp{xs@var{tagname}}. On some systems, this construct is used to
6501describe a forward reference to a structure named @var{tagname}.
6502On other systems, this construct is not supported at all.
6503
6504@findex DBX_CONTIN_LENGTH
6505@item DBX_CONTIN_LENGTH
6506A symbol name in DBX-format debugging information is normally
6507continued (split into two separate @code{.stabs} directives) when it
6508exceeds a certain length (by default, 80 characters). On some
6509operating systems, DBX requires this splitting; on others, splitting
6510must not be done. You can inhibit splitting by defining this macro
6511with the value zero. You can override the default splitting-length by
6512defining this macro as an expression for the length you desire.
6513
6514@findex DBX_CONTIN_CHAR
6515@item DBX_CONTIN_CHAR
6516Normally continuation is indicated by adding a @samp{\} character to
6517the end of a @code{.stabs} string when a continuation follows. To use
6518a different character instead, define this macro as a character
6519constant for the character you want to use. Do not define this macro
6520if backslash is correct for your system.
6521
6522@findex DBX_STATIC_STAB_DATA_SECTION
6523@item DBX_STATIC_STAB_DATA_SECTION
6524Define this macro if it is necessary to go to the data section before
6525outputting the @samp{.stabs} pseudo-op for a non-global static
6526variable.
6527
6528@findex DBX_TYPE_DECL_STABS_CODE
6529@item DBX_TYPE_DECL_STABS_CODE
6530The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
6531for a typedef. The default is @code{N_LSYM}.
6532
6533@findex DBX_STATIC_CONST_VAR_CODE
6534@item DBX_STATIC_CONST_VAR_CODE
6535The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
6536for a static variable located in the text section. DBX format does not
6537provide any ``right'' way to do this. The default is @code{N_FUN}.
6538
6539@findex DBX_REGPARM_STABS_CODE
6540@item DBX_REGPARM_STABS_CODE
6541The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
6542for a parameter passed in registers. DBX format does not provide any
6543``right'' way to do this. The default is @code{N_RSYM}.
6544
6545@findex DBX_REGPARM_STABS_LETTER
6546@item DBX_REGPARM_STABS_LETTER
6547The letter to use in DBX symbol data to identify a symbol as a parameter
6548passed in registers. DBX format does not customarily provide any way to
6549do this. The default is @code{'P'}.
6550
6551@findex DBX_MEMPARM_STABS_LETTER
6552@item DBX_MEMPARM_STABS_LETTER
6553The letter to use in DBX symbol data to identify a symbol as a stack
6554parameter. The default is @code{'p'}.
6555
6556@findex DBX_FUNCTION_FIRST
6557@item DBX_FUNCTION_FIRST
6558Define this macro if the DBX information for a function and its
6559arguments should precede the assembler code for the function. Normally,
6560in DBX format, the debugging information entirely follows the assembler
6561code.
6562
6563@findex DBX_LBRAC_FIRST
6564@item DBX_LBRAC_FIRST
6565Define this macro if the @code{N_LBRAC} symbol for a block should
6566precede the debugging information for variables and functions defined in
6567that block. Normally, in DBX format, the @code{N_LBRAC} symbol comes
6568first.
6569
6570@findex DBX_BLOCKS_FUNCTION_RELATIVE
6571@item DBX_BLOCKS_FUNCTION_RELATIVE
6572Define this macro if the value of a symbol describing the scope of a
6573block (@code{N_LBRAC} or @code{N_RBRAC}) should be relative to the start
6574of the enclosing function. Normally, GNU C uses an absolute address.
6575
6576@findex DBX_USE_BINCL
6577@item DBX_USE_BINCL
6578Define this macro if GNU C should generate @code{N_BINCL} and
6579@code{N_EINCL} stabs for included header files, as on Sun systems. This
6580macro also directs GNU C to output a type number as a pair of a file
6581number and a type number within the file. Normally, GNU C does not
6582generate @code{N_BINCL} or @code{N_EINCL} stabs, and it outputs a single
6583number for a type number.
6584@end table
6585
6586@node DBX Hooks
6587@subsection Open-Ended Hooks for DBX Format
6588
6589@c prevent bad page break with this line
6590These are hooks for DBX format.
6591
6592@table @code
6593@findex DBX_OUTPUT_LBRAC
6594@item DBX_OUTPUT_LBRAC (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6595Define this macro to say how to output to @var{stream} the debugging
6596information for the start of a scope level for variable names. The
6597argument @var{name} is the name of an assembler symbol (for use with
6598@code{assemble_name}) whose value is the address where the scope begins.
6599
6600@findex DBX_OUTPUT_RBRAC
6601@item DBX_OUTPUT_RBRAC (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6602Like @code{DBX_OUTPUT_LBRAC}, but for the end of a scope level.
6603
6604@findex DBX_OUTPUT_ENUM
6605@item DBX_OUTPUT_ENUM (@var{stream}, @var{type})
6606Define this macro if the target machine requires special handling to
6607output an enumeration type. The definition should be a C statement
6608(sans semicolon) to output the appropriate information to @var{stream}
6609for the type @var{type}.
6610
6611@findex DBX_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_END
6612@item DBX_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_END (@var{stream}, @var{function})
6613Define this macro if the target machine requires special output at the
6614end of the debugging information for a function. The definition should
6615be a C statement (sans semicolon) to output the appropriate information
6616to @var{stream}. @var{function} is the @code{FUNCTION_DECL} node for
6617the function.
6618
6619@findex DBX_OUTPUT_STANDARD_TYPES
6620@item DBX_OUTPUT_STANDARD_TYPES (@var{syms})
6621Define this macro if you need to control the order of output of the
6622standard data types at the beginning of compilation. The argument
6623@var{syms} is a @code{tree} which is a chain of all the predefined
6624global symbols, including names of data types.
6625
6626Normally, DBX output starts with definitions of the types for integers
6627and characters, followed by all the other predefined types of the
6628particular language in no particular order.
6629
6630On some machines, it is necessary to output different particular types
6631first. To do this, define @code{DBX_OUTPUT_STANDARD_TYPES} to output
6632those symbols in the necessary order. Any predefined types that you
6633don't explicitly output will be output afterward in no particular order.
6634
6635Be careful not to define this macro so that it works only for C. There
6636are no global variables to access most of the built-in types, because
6637another language may have another set of types. The way to output a
6638particular type is to look through @var{syms} to see if you can find it.
6639Here is an example:
6640
6641@smallexample
6642@{
6643 tree decl;
6644 for (decl = syms; decl; decl = TREE_CHAIN (decl))
6645 if (!strcmp (IDENTIFIER_POINTER (DECL_NAME (decl)),
6646 "long int"))
6647 dbxout_symbol (decl);
6648 @dots{}
6649@}
6650@end smallexample
6651
6652@noindent
6653This does nothing if the expected type does not exist.
6654
6655See the function @code{init_decl_processing} in @file{c-decl.c} to find
6656the names to use for all the built-in C types.
6657
6658Here is another way of finding a particular type:
6659
6660@c this is still overfull. --mew 10feb93
6661@smallexample
6662@{
6663 tree decl;
6664 for (decl = syms; decl; decl = TREE_CHAIN (decl))
6665 if (TREE_CODE (decl) == TYPE_DECL
6666 && (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (decl))
6667 == INTEGER_CST)
6668 && TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (decl)) == 16
6669 && TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (decl)))
6670@group
6671 /* @r{This must be @code{unsigned short}.} */
6672 dbxout_symbol (decl);
6673 @dots{}
6674@}
6675@end group
6676@end smallexample
6677
6678@findex NO_DBX_FUNCTION_END
6679@item NO_DBX_FUNCTION_END
6680Some stabs encapsulation formats (in particular ECOFF), cannot handle the
6681@code{.stabs "",N_FUN,,0,0,Lscope-function-1} gdb dbx extention construct.
6682On those machines, define this macro to turn this feature off without
6683disturbing the rest of the gdb extensions.
6684
6685@end table
6686
6687@node File Names and DBX
6688@subsection File Names in DBX Format
6689
6690@c prevent bad page break with this line
6691This describes file names in DBX format.
6692
6693@table @code
6694@findex DBX_WORKING_DIRECTORY
6695@item DBX_WORKING_DIRECTORY
6696Define this if DBX wants to have the current directory recorded in each
6697object file.
6698
6699Note that the working directory is always recorded if GDB extensions are
6700enabled.
6701
6702@findex DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILENAME
6703@item DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILENAME (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6704A C statement to output DBX debugging information to the stdio stream
6705@var{stream} which indicates that file @var{name} is the main source
6706file---the file specified as the input file for compilation.
6707This macro is called only once, at the beginning of compilation.
6708
6709This macro need not be defined if the standard form of output
6710for DBX debugging information is appropriate.
6711
6712@findex DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_DIRECTORY
6713@item DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_DIRECTORY (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6714A C statement to output DBX debugging information to the stdio stream
6715@var{stream} which indicates that the current directory during
6716compilation is named @var{name}.
6717
6718This macro need not be defined if the standard form of output
6719for DBX debugging information is appropriate.
6720
6721@findex DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILE_END
6722@item DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILE_END (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6723A C statement to output DBX debugging information at the end of
6724compilation of the main source file @var{name}.
6725
6726If you don't define this macro, nothing special is output at the end
6727of compilation, which is correct for most machines.
6728
6729@findex DBX_OUTPUT_SOURCE_FILENAME
6730@item DBX_OUTPUT_SOURCE_FILENAME (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6731A C statement to output DBX debugging information to the stdio stream
6732@var{stream} which indicates that file @var{name} is the current source
6733file. This output is generated each time input shifts to a different
6734source file as a result of @samp{#include}, the end of an included file,
6735or a @samp{#line} command.
6736
6737This macro need not be defined if the standard form of output
6738for DBX debugging information is appropriate.
6739@end table
6740
6741@need 2000
6742@node SDB and DWARF
6743@subsection Macros for SDB and DWARF Output
6744
6745@c prevent bad page break with this line
6746Here are macros for SDB and DWARF output.
6747
6748@table @code
6749@findex SDB_DEBUGGING_INFO
6750@item SDB_DEBUGGING_INFO
6751Define this macro if GNU CC should produce COFF-style debugging output
6752for SDB in response to the @samp{-g} option.
6753
6754@findex DWARF_DEBUGGING_INFO
6755@item DWARF_DEBUGGING_INFO
6756Define this macro if GNU CC should produce dwarf format debugging output
6757in response to the @samp{-g} option.
6758
f3ff3f4a
JM
6759@findex DWARF2_DEBUGGING_INFO
6760@item DWARF2_DEBUGGING_INFO
6761Define this macro if GNU CC should produce dwarf version 2 format
6762debugging output in response to the @samp{-g} option.
6763
861bb6c1
JL
6764To support optional call frame debugging information, you must also
6765define @code{INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX} and either set
6766@code{RTX_FRAME_RELATED_P} on the prologue insns if you use RTL for the
6767prologue, or call @code{dwarf2out_def_cfa} and @code{dwarf2out_reg_save}
6768as appropriate from @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} if you don't.
6769
9ec36da5
JL
6770@findex DWARF2_FRAME_INFO
6771@item DWARF2_FRAME_INFO
6772Define this macro to a nonzero value if GNU CC should always output
6773Dwarf 2 frame information. If @code{DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO}
6774(@pxref{Exception Region Output} is nonzero, GNU CC will output this
6775information not matter how you define @code{DWARF2_FRAME_INFO}.
6776
deabc777
PE
6777@findex LINKER_DOES_NOT_WORK_WITH_DWARF2
6778@item LINKER_DOES_NOT_WORK_WITH_DWARF2
e5e809f4
JL
6779Define this macro if the linker does not work with Dwarf version 2.
6780Normally, if the user specifies only @samp{-ggdb} GNU CC will use Dwarf
6781version 2 if available; this macro disables this. See the description
6782of the @code{PREFERRED_DEBUGGING_TYPE} macro for more details.
deabc777 6783
feca2ed3
JW
6784@findex PUT_SDB_@dots{}
6785@item PUT_SDB_@dots{}
6786Define these macros to override the assembler syntax for the special
6787SDB assembler directives. See @file{sdbout.c} for a list of these
6788macros and their arguments. If the standard syntax is used, you need
6789not define them yourself.
6790
6791@findex SDB_DELIM
6792@item SDB_DELIM
6793Some assemblers do not support a semicolon as a delimiter, even between
6794SDB assembler directives. In that case, define this macro to be the
6795delimiter to use (usually @samp{\n}). It is not necessary to define
6796a new set of @code{PUT_SDB_@var{op}} macros if this is the only change
6797required.
6798
6799@findex SDB_GENERATE_FAKE
6800@item SDB_GENERATE_FAKE
6801Define this macro to override the usual method of constructing a dummy
6802name for anonymous structure and union types. See @file{sdbout.c} for
6803more information.
6804
6805@findex SDB_ALLOW_UNKNOWN_REFERENCES
6806@item SDB_ALLOW_UNKNOWN_REFERENCES
6807Define this macro to allow references to unknown structure,
6808union, or enumeration tags to be emitted. Standard COFF does not
6809allow handling of unknown references, MIPS ECOFF has support for
6810it.
6811
6812@findex SDB_ALLOW_FORWARD_REFERENCES
6813@item SDB_ALLOW_FORWARD_REFERENCES
6814Define this macro to allow references to structure, union, or
6815enumeration tags that have not yet been seen to be handled. Some
6816assemblers choke if forward tags are used, while some require it.
6817@end table
6818
6819@node Cross-compilation
6820@section Cross Compilation and Floating Point
6821@cindex cross compilation and floating point
6822@cindex floating point and cross compilation
6823
6824While all modern machines use 2's complement representation for integers,
6825there are a variety of representations for floating point numbers. This
6826means that in a cross-compiler the representation of floating point numbers
6827in the compiled program may be different from that used in the machine
6828doing the compilation.
6829
6830@findex atof
6831Because different representation systems may offer different amounts of
6832range and precision, the cross compiler cannot safely use the host
6833machine's floating point arithmetic. Therefore, floating point constants
6834must be represented in the target machine's format. This means that the
6835cross compiler cannot use @code{atof} to parse a floating point constant;
6836it must have its own special routine to use instead. Also, constant
6837folding must emulate the target machine's arithmetic (or must not be done
6838at all).
6839
6840The macros in the following table should be defined only if you are cross
6841compiling between different floating point formats.
6842
6843Otherwise, don't define them. Then default definitions will be set up which
6844use @code{double} as the data type, @code{==} to test for equality, etc.
6845
6846You don't need to worry about how many times you use an operand of any
6847of these macros. The compiler never uses operands which have side effects.
6848
6849@table @code
6850@findex REAL_VALUE_TYPE
6851@item REAL_VALUE_TYPE
6852A macro for the C data type to be used to hold a floating point value
6853in the target machine's format. Typically this would be a
6854@code{struct} containing an array of @code{int}.
6855
6856@findex REAL_VALUES_EQUAL
6857@item REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (@var{x}, @var{y})
6858A macro for a C expression which compares for equality the two values,
6859@var{x} and @var{y}, both of type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}.
6860
6861@findex REAL_VALUES_LESS
6862@item REAL_VALUES_LESS (@var{x}, @var{y})
6863A macro for a C expression which tests whether @var{x} is less than
6864@var{y}, both values being of type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE} and
6865interpreted as floating point numbers in the target machine's
6866representation.
6867
6868@findex REAL_VALUE_LDEXP
6869@findex ldexp
6870@item REAL_VALUE_LDEXP (@var{x}, @var{scale})
6871A macro for a C expression which performs the standard library
6872function @code{ldexp}, but using the target machine's floating point
6873representation. Both @var{x} and the value of the expression have
6874type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}. The second argument, @var{scale}, is an
6875integer.
6876
6877@findex REAL_VALUE_FIX
6878@item REAL_VALUE_FIX (@var{x})
6879A macro whose definition is a C expression to convert the target-machine
6880floating point value @var{x} to a signed integer. @var{x} has type
6881@code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}.
6882
6883@findex REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_FIX
6884@item REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_FIX (@var{x})
6885A macro whose definition is a C expression to convert the target-machine
6886floating point value @var{x} to an unsigned integer. @var{x} has type
6887@code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}.
6888
6889@findex REAL_VALUE_RNDZINT
6890@item REAL_VALUE_RNDZINT (@var{x})
6891A macro whose definition is a C expression to round the target-machine
6892floating point value @var{x} towards zero to an integer value (but still
6893as a floating point number). @var{x} has type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE},
6894and so does the value.
6895
6896@findex REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_RNDZINT
6897@item REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_RNDZINT (@var{x})
6898A macro whose definition is a C expression to round the target-machine
6899floating point value @var{x} towards zero to an unsigned integer value
6900(but still represented as a floating point number). @var{x} has type
6901@code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}, and so does the value.
6902
6903@findex REAL_VALUE_ATOF
6904@item REAL_VALUE_ATOF (@var{string}, @var{mode})
6905A macro for a C expression which converts @var{string}, an expression of
6906type @code{char *}, into a floating point number in the target machine's
6907representation for mode @var{mode}. The value has type
6908@code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}.
6909
6910@findex REAL_INFINITY
6911@item REAL_INFINITY
6912Define this macro if infinity is a possible floating point value, and
6913therefore division by 0 is legitimate.
6914
6915@findex REAL_VALUE_ISINF
6916@findex isinf
6917@item REAL_VALUE_ISINF (@var{x})
6918A macro for a C expression which determines whether @var{x}, a floating
6919point value, is infinity. The value has type @code{int}.
6920By default, this is defined to call @code{isinf}.
6921
6922@findex REAL_VALUE_ISNAN
6923@findex isnan
6924@item REAL_VALUE_ISNAN (@var{x})
6925A macro for a C expression which determines whether @var{x}, a floating
6926point value, is a ``nan'' (not-a-number). The value has type
6927@code{int}. By default, this is defined to call @code{isnan}.
6928@end table
6929
6930@cindex constant folding and floating point
6931Define the following additional macros if you want to make floating
6932point constant folding work while cross compiling. If you don't
6933define them, cross compilation is still possible, but constant folding
6934will not happen for floating point values.
6935
6936@table @code
6937@findex REAL_ARITHMETIC
6938@item REAL_ARITHMETIC (@var{output}, @var{code}, @var{x}, @var{y})
6939A macro for a C statement which calculates an arithmetic operation of
6940the two floating point values @var{x} and @var{y}, both of type
6941@code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE} in the target machine's representation, to
6942produce a result of the same type and representation which is stored
6943in @var{output} (which will be a variable).
6944
6945The operation to be performed is specified by @var{code}, a tree code
6946which will always be one of the following: @code{PLUS_EXPR},
6947@code{MINUS_EXPR}, @code{MULT_EXPR}, @code{RDIV_EXPR},
6948@code{MAX_EXPR}, @code{MIN_EXPR}.@refill
6949
6950@cindex overflow while constant folding
6951The expansion of this macro is responsible for checking for overflow.
6952If overflow happens, the macro expansion should execute the statement
6953@code{return 0;}, which indicates the inability to perform the
6954arithmetic operation requested.
6955
6956@findex REAL_VALUE_NEGATE
6957@item REAL_VALUE_NEGATE (@var{x})
6958A macro for a C expression which returns the negative of the floating
6959point value @var{x}. Both @var{x} and the value of the expression
6960have type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE} and are in the target machine's
6961floating point representation.
6962
6963There is no way for this macro to report overflow, since overflow
6964can't happen in the negation operation.
6965
6966@findex REAL_VALUE_TRUNCATE
6967@item REAL_VALUE_TRUNCATE (@var{mode}, @var{x})
6968A macro for a C expression which converts the floating point value
6969@var{x} to mode @var{mode}.
6970
6971Both @var{x} and the value of the expression are in the target machine's
6972floating point representation and have type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}.
6973However, the value should have an appropriate bit pattern to be output
6974properly as a floating constant whose precision accords with mode
6975@var{mode}.
6976
6977There is no way for this macro to report overflow.
6978
6979@findex REAL_VALUE_TO_INT
6980@item REAL_VALUE_TO_INT (@var{low}, @var{high}, @var{x})
6981A macro for a C expression which converts a floating point value
6982@var{x} into a double-precision integer which is then stored into
6983@var{low} and @var{high}, two variables of type @var{int}.
6984
6985@item REAL_VALUE_FROM_INT (@var{x}, @var{low}, @var{high}, @var{mode})
6986@findex REAL_VALUE_FROM_INT
6987A macro for a C expression which converts a double-precision integer
6988found in @var{low} and @var{high}, two variables of type @var{int},
6989into a floating point value which is then stored into @var{x}.
6990The value is in the target machine's representation for mode @var{mode}
6991and has the type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}.
6992@end table
6993
6994@node Misc
6995@section Miscellaneous Parameters
6996@cindex parameters, miscellaneous
6997
6998@c prevent bad page break with this line
6999Here are several miscellaneous parameters.
7000
7001@table @code
7002@item PREDICATE_CODES
7003@findex PREDICATE_CODES
7004Define this if you have defined special-purpose predicates in the file
7005@file{@var{machine}.c}. This macro is called within an initializer of an
7006array of structures. The first field in the structure is the name of a
7007predicate and the second field is an array of rtl codes. For each
7008predicate, list all rtl codes that can be in expressions matched by the
7009predicate. The list should have a trailing comma. Here is an example
7010of two entries in the list for a typical RISC machine:
7011
7012@smallexample
7013#define PREDICATE_CODES \
7014 @{"gen_reg_rtx_operand", @{SUBREG, REG@}@}, \
7015 @{"reg_or_short_cint_operand", @{SUBREG, REG, CONST_INT@}@},
7016@end smallexample
7017
7018Defining this macro does not affect the generated code (however,
7019incorrect definitions that omit an rtl code that may be matched by the
7020predicate can cause the compiler to malfunction). Instead, it allows
7021the table built by @file{genrecog} to be more compact and efficient,
7022thus speeding up the compiler. The most important predicates to include
556e0f21 7023in the list specified by this macro are those used in the most insn
feca2ed3
JW
7024patterns.
7025
7026@findex CASE_VECTOR_MODE
7027@item CASE_VECTOR_MODE
7028An alias for a machine mode name. This is the machine mode that
7029elements of a jump-table should have.
7030
33f7f353
JR
7031@findex CASE_VECTOR_SHORTEN_MODE
7032@item CASE_VECTOR_SHORTEN_MODE (@var{min_offset}, @var{max_offset}, @var{body})
7033Optional: return the preferred mode for an @code{addr_diff_vec}
7034when the minimum and maximum offset are known. If you define this,
7035it enables extra code in branch shortening to deal with @code{addr_diff_vec}.
7036To make this work, you also have to define INSN_ALIGN and
7037make the alignment for @code{addr_diff_vec} explicit.
391aaa6b 7038The @var{body} argument is provided so that the offset_unsigned and scale
33f7f353
JR
7039flags can be updated.
7040
feca2ed3
JW
7041@findex CASE_VECTOR_PC_RELATIVE
7042@item CASE_VECTOR_PC_RELATIVE
18543a22
ILT
7043Define this macro to be a C expression to indicate when jump-tables
7044should contain relative addresses. If jump-tables never contain
7045relative addresses, then you need not define this macro.
feca2ed3
JW
7046
7047@findex CASE_DROPS_THROUGH
7048@item CASE_DROPS_THROUGH
7049Define this if control falls through a @code{case} insn when the index
7050value is out of range. This means the specified default-label is
7051actually ignored by the @code{case} insn proper.
7052
7053@findex CASE_VALUES_THRESHOLD
7054@item CASE_VALUES_THRESHOLD
7055Define this to be the smallest number of different values for which it
7056is best to use a jump-table instead of a tree of conditional branches.
7057The default is four for machines with a @code{casesi} instruction and
7058five otherwise. This is best for most machines.
7059
7060@findex WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
7061@item WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
7062Define this macro if operations between registers with integral mode
7063smaller than a word are always performed on the entire register.
7064Most RISC machines have this property and most CISC machines do not.
7065
7066@findex LOAD_EXTEND_OP
7067@item LOAD_EXTEND_OP (@var{mode})
7068Define this macro to be a C expression indicating when insns that read
7069memory in @var{mode}, an integral mode narrower than a word, set the
7070bits outside of @var{mode} to be either the sign-extension or the
7071zero-extension of the data read. Return @code{SIGN_EXTEND} for values
7072of @var{mode} for which the
7073insn sign-extends, @code{ZERO_EXTEND} for which it zero-extends, and
7074@code{NIL} for other modes.
7075
7076This macro is not called with @var{mode} non-integral or with a width
7077greater than or equal to @code{BITS_PER_WORD}, so you may return any
7078value in this case. Do not define this macro if it would always return
7079@code{NIL}. On machines where this macro is defined, you will normally
7080define it as the constant @code{SIGN_EXTEND} or @code{ZERO_EXTEND}.
7081
77643ab8
MM
7082@findex SHORT_IMMEDIATES_SIGN_EXTEND
7083@item SHORT_IMMEDIATES_SIGN_EXTEND
7084Define this macro if loading short immediate values into registers sign
7085extends.
7086
feca2ed3
JW
7087@findex IMPLICIT_FIX_EXPR
7088@item IMPLICIT_FIX_EXPR
7089An alias for a tree code that should be used by default for conversion
7090of floating point values to fixed point. Normally,
7091@code{FIX_ROUND_EXPR} is used.@refill
7092
7093@findex FIXUNS_TRUNC_LIKE_FIX_TRUNC
7094@item FIXUNS_TRUNC_LIKE_FIX_TRUNC
7095Define this macro if the same instructions that convert a floating
7096point number to a signed fixed point number also convert validly to an
7097unsigned one.
7098
7099@findex EASY_DIV_EXPR
7100@item EASY_DIV_EXPR
7101An alias for a tree code that is the easiest kind of division to
7102compile code for in the general case. It may be
7103@code{TRUNC_DIV_EXPR}, @code{FLOOR_DIV_EXPR}, @code{CEIL_DIV_EXPR} or
7104@code{ROUND_DIV_EXPR}. These four division operators differ in how
7105they round the result to an integer. @code{EASY_DIV_EXPR} is used
7106when it is permissible to use any of those kinds of division and the
7107choice should be made on the basis of efficiency.@refill
7108
7109@findex MOVE_MAX
7110@item MOVE_MAX
7111The maximum number of bytes that a single instruction can move quickly
7112between memory and registers or between two memory locations.
7113
7114@findex MAX_MOVE_MAX
7115@item MAX_MOVE_MAX
7116The maximum number of bytes that a single instruction can move quickly
7117between memory and registers or between two memory locations. If this
7118is undefined, the default is @code{MOVE_MAX}. Otherwise, it is the
7119constant value that is the largest value that @code{MOVE_MAX} can have
7120at run-time.
7121
7122@findex SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
7123@item SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
7124A C expression that is nonzero if on this machine the number of bits
7125actually used for the count of a shift operation is equal to the number
7126of bits needed to represent the size of the object being shifted. When
7127this macro is non-zero, the compiler will assume that it is safe to omit
7128a sign-extend, zero-extend, and certain bitwise `and' instructions that
7129truncates the count of a shift operation. On machines that have
7130instructions that act on bitfields at variable positions, which may
7131include `bit test' instructions, a nonzero @code{SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED}
7132also enables deletion of truncations of the values that serve as
7133arguments to bitfield instructions.
7134
7135If both types of instructions truncate the count (for shifts) and
7136position (for bitfield operations), or if no variable-position bitfield
7137instructions exist, you should define this macro.
7138
7139However, on some machines, such as the 80386 and the 680x0, truncation
7140only applies to shift operations and not the (real or pretended)
7141bitfield operations. Define @code{SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED} to be zero on
7142such machines. Instead, add patterns to the @file{md} file that include
7143the implied truncation of the shift instructions.
7144
7145You need not define this macro if it would always have the value of zero.
7146
7147@findex TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION
7148@item TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION (@var{outprec}, @var{inprec})
7149A C expression which is nonzero if on this machine it is safe to
7150``convert'' an integer of @var{inprec} bits to one of @var{outprec}
7151bits (where @var{outprec} is smaller than @var{inprec}) by merely
7152operating on it as if it had only @var{outprec} bits.
7153
7154On many machines, this expression can be 1.
7155
7156@c rearranged this, removed the phrase "it is reported that". this was
7157@c to fix an overfull hbox. --mew 10feb93
7158When @code{TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION} returns 1 for a pair of sizes for
7159modes for which @code{MODES_TIEABLE_P} is 0, suboptimal code can result.
7160If this is the case, making @code{TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION} return 0 in
7161such cases may improve things.
7162
7163@findex STORE_FLAG_VALUE
7164@item STORE_FLAG_VALUE
7165A C expression describing the value returned by a comparison operator
7166with an integral mode and stored by a store-flag instruction
7167(@samp{s@var{cond}}) when the condition is true. This description must
7168apply to @emph{all} the @samp{s@var{cond}} patterns and all the
7169comparison operators whose results have a @code{MODE_INT} mode.
7170
7171A value of 1 or -1 means that the instruction implementing the
7172comparison operator returns exactly 1 or -1 when the comparison is true
7173and 0 when the comparison is false. Otherwise, the value indicates
7174which bits of the result are guaranteed to be 1 when the comparison is
7175true. This value is interpreted in the mode of the comparison
7176operation, which is given by the mode of the first operand in the
7177@samp{s@var{cond}} pattern. Either the low bit or the sign bit of
7178@code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} be on. Presently, only those bits are used by
7179the compiler.
7180
7181If @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} is neither 1 or -1, the compiler will
7182generate code that depends only on the specified bits. It can also
7183replace comparison operators with equivalent operations if they cause
7184the required bits to be set, even if the remaining bits are undefined.
7185For example, on a machine whose comparison operators return an
7186@code{SImode} value and where @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} is defined as
7187@samp{0x80000000}, saying that just the sign bit is relevant, the
7188expression
7189
7190@smallexample
7191(ne:SI (and:SI @var{x} (const_int @var{power-of-2})) (const_int 0))
7192@end smallexample
7193
7194@noindent
7195can be converted to
7196
7197@smallexample
7198(ashift:SI @var{x} (const_int @var{n}))
7199@end smallexample
7200
7201@noindent
7202where @var{n} is the appropriate shift count to move the bit being
7203tested into the sign bit.
7204
7205There is no way to describe a machine that always sets the low-order bit
7206for a true value, but does not guarantee the value of any other bits,
7207but we do not know of any machine that has such an instruction. If you
7208are trying to port GNU CC to such a machine, include an instruction to
7209perform a logical-and of the result with 1 in the pattern for the
7210comparison operators and let us know
7211@ifset USING
7212(@pxref{Bug Reporting,,How to Report Bugs}).
7213@end ifset
7214@ifclear USING
7215(@pxref{Bug Reporting,,How to Report Bugs,gcc.info,Using GCC}).
7216@end ifclear
7217
7218Often, a machine will have multiple instructions that obtain a value
7219from a comparison (or the condition codes). Here are rules to guide the
7220choice of value for @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE}, and hence the instructions
7221to be used:
7222
7223@itemize @bullet
7224@item
7225Use the shortest sequence that yields a valid definition for
7226@code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE}. It is more efficient for the compiler to
7227``normalize'' the value (convert it to, e.g., 1 or 0) than for the
7228comparison operators to do so because there may be opportunities to
7229combine the normalization with other operations.
7230
7231@item
7232For equal-length sequences, use a value of 1 or -1, with -1 being
7233slightly preferred on machines with expensive jumps and 1 preferred on
7234other machines.
7235
7236@item
7237As a second choice, choose a value of @samp{0x80000001} if instructions
7238exist that set both the sign and low-order bits but do not define the
7239others.
7240
7241@item
7242Otherwise, use a value of @samp{0x80000000}.
7243@end itemize
7244
7245Many machines can produce both the value chosen for
7246@code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} and its negation in the same number of
7247instructions. On those machines, you should also define a pattern for
7248those cases, e.g., one matching
7249
7250@smallexample
7251(set @var{A} (neg:@var{m} (ne:@var{m} @var{B} @var{C})))
7252@end smallexample
7253
7254Some machines can also perform @code{and} or @code{plus} operations on
7255condition code values with less instructions than the corresponding
7256@samp{s@var{cond}} insn followed by @code{and} or @code{plus}. On those
7257machines, define the appropriate patterns. Use the names @code{incscc}
7258and @code{decscc}, respectively, for the patterns which perform
7259@code{plus} or @code{minus} operations on condition code values. See
7260@file{rs6000.md} for some examples. The GNU Superoptizer can be used to
7261find such instruction sequences on other machines.
7262
7263You need not define @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} if the machine has no store-flag
7264instructions.
7265
7266@findex FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
7267@item FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
7268A C expression that gives a non-zero floating point value that is
7269returned when comparison operators with floating-point results are true.
7270Define this macro on machine that have comparison operations that return
7271floating-point values. If there are no such operations, do not define
7272this macro.
7273
7274@findex Pmode
7275@item Pmode
7276An alias for the machine mode for pointers. On most machines, define
7277this to be the integer mode corresponding to the width of a hardware
7278pointer; @code{SImode} on 32-bit machine or @code{DImode} on 64-bit machines.
7279On some machines you must define this to be one of the partial integer
7280modes, such as @code{PSImode}.
7281
7282The width of @code{Pmode} must be at least as large as the value of
7283@code{POINTER_SIZE}. If it is not equal, you must define the macro
7284@code{POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED} to specify how pointers are extended
7285to @code{Pmode}.
7286
7287@findex FUNCTION_MODE
7288@item FUNCTION_MODE
7289An alias for the machine mode used for memory references to functions
7290being called, in @code{call} RTL expressions. On most machines this
7291should be @code{QImode}.
7292
7293@findex INTEGRATE_THRESHOLD
7294@item INTEGRATE_THRESHOLD (@var{decl})
7295A C expression for the maximum number of instructions above which the
7296function @var{decl} should not be inlined. @var{decl} is a
7297@code{FUNCTION_DECL} node.
7298
7299The default definition of this macro is 64 plus 8 times the number of
7300arguments that the function accepts. Some people think a larger
7301threshold should be used on RISC machines.
7302
7303@findex SCCS_DIRECTIVE
7304@item SCCS_DIRECTIVE
7305Define this if the preprocessor should ignore @code{#sccs} directives
7306and print no error message.
7307
7308@findex NO_IMPLICIT_EXTERN_C
7309@item NO_IMPLICIT_EXTERN_C
7310Define this macro if the system header files support C++ as well as C.
7311This macro inhibits the usual method of using system header files in
7312C++, which is to pretend that the file's contents are enclosed in
7313@samp{extern "C" @{@dots{}@}}.
7314
7315@findex HANDLE_PRAGMA
7316@findex #pragma
7317@findex pragma
7318@item HANDLE_PRAGMA (@var{stream}, @var{node})
7319Define this macro if you want to implement any pragmas. If defined, it
7320is a C expression whose value is 1 if the pragma was handled by the function.
7321The argument @var{stream} is the stdio input stream from which the source text
7322can be read. @var{node} is the tree node for the identifier after the
7323@code{#pragma}.
7324
7325It is generally a bad idea to implement new uses of @code{#pragma}. The
7326only reason to define this macro is for compatibility with other
7327compilers that do support @code{#pragma} for the sake of any user
7328programs which already use it.
7329
7330@findex VALID_MACHINE_DECL_ATTRIBUTE
7331@item VALID_MACHINE_DECL_ATTRIBUTE (@var{decl}, @var{attributes}, @var{identifier}, @var{args})
7332If defined, a C expression whose value is nonzero if @var{identifier} with
7333arguments @var{args} is a valid machine specific attribute for @var{decl}.
7334The attributes in @var{attributes} have previously been assigned to @var{decl}.
7335
7336@findex VALID_MACHINE_TYPE_ATTRIBUTE
7337@item VALID_MACHINE_TYPE_ATTRIBUTE (@var{type}, @var{attributes}, @var{identifier}, @var{args})
7338If defined, a C expression whose value is nonzero if @var{identifier} with
7339arguments @var{args} is a valid machine specific attribute for @var{type}.
7340The attributes in @var{attributes} have previously been assigned to @var{type}.
7341
7342@findex COMP_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
7343@item COMP_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES (@var{type1}, @var{type2})
7344If defined, a C expression whose value is zero if the attributes on
7345@var{type1} and @var{type2} are incompatible, one if they are compatible,
7346and two if they are nearly compatible (which causes a warning to be
7347generated).
7348
7349@findex SET_DEFAULT_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
7350@item SET_DEFAULT_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES (@var{type})
7351If defined, a C statement that assigns default attributes to
7352newly defined @var{type}.
7353
d9525bec
BK
7354@findex MERGE_MACHINE_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
7355@item MERGE_MACHINE_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES (@var{type1}, @var{type2})
7356Define this macro if the merging of type attributes needs special handling.
7357If defined, the result is a list of the combined TYPE_ATTRIBUTES of
7358@var{type1} and @var{type2}. It is assumed that comptypes has already been
7359called and returned 1.
7360
7361@findex MERGE_MACHINE_DECL_ATTRIBUTES
7362@item MERGE_MACHINE_DECL_ATTRIBUTES (@var{olddecl}, @var{newdecl})
7363Define this macro if the merging of decl attributes needs special handling.
7364If defined, the result is a list of the combined DECL_MACHINE_ATTRIBUTES of
7365@var{olddecl} and @var{newdecl}. @var{newdecl} is a duplicate declaration
7366of @var{olddecl}. Examples of when this is needed are when one attribute
7367overrides another, or when an attribute is nullified by a subsequent
7368definition.
7369
9ec36da5
JL
7370@findex SET_DEFAULT_DECL_ATTRIBUTES
7371@item SET_DEFAULT_DECL_ATTRIBUTES (@var{decl}, @var{attributes})
7372If defined, a C statement that assigns default attributes to
7373newly defined @var{decl}.
7374
feca2ed3
JW
7375@findex DOLLARS_IN_IDENTIFIERS
7376@item DOLLARS_IN_IDENTIFIERS
7377Define this macro to control use of the character @samp{$} in identifier
37d13a29 7378names. 0 means @samp{$} is not allowed by default; 1 means it is allowed.
feca2ed3 73791 is the default; there is no need to define this macro in that case.
37d13a29 7380This macro controls the compiler proper; it does not affect the preprocessor.
feca2ed3
JW
7381
7382@findex NO_DOLLAR_IN_LABEL
7383@item NO_DOLLAR_IN_LABEL
7384Define this macro if the assembler does not accept the character
7385@samp{$} in label names. By default constructors and destructors in
7386G++ have @samp{$} in the identifiers. If this macro is defined,
7387@samp{.} is used instead.
7388
7389@findex NO_DOT_IN_LABEL
7390@item NO_DOT_IN_LABEL
7391Define this macro if the assembler does not accept the character
7392@samp{.} in label names. By default constructors and destructors in G++
7393have names that use @samp{.}. If this macro is defined, these names
7394are rewritten to avoid @samp{.}.
7395
7396@findex DEFAULT_MAIN_RETURN
7397@item DEFAULT_MAIN_RETURN
7398Define this macro if the target system expects every program's @code{main}
7399function to return a standard ``success'' value by default (if no other
7400value is explicitly returned).
7401
7402The definition should be a C statement (sans semicolon) to generate the
7403appropriate rtl instructions. It is used only when compiling the end of
7404@code{main}.
7405
7406@item HAVE_ATEXIT
7407@findex HAVE_ATEXIT
7408Define this if the target system supports the function
7409@code{atexit} from the ANSI C standard. If this is not defined,
7410and @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP} is not defined, a default
7411@code{exit} function will be provided to support C++.
7412
7413@item EXIT_BODY
7414@findex EXIT_BODY
7415Define this if your @code{exit} function needs to do something
7416besides calling an external function @code{_cleanup} before
7417terminating with @code{_exit}. The @code{EXIT_BODY} macro is
e9a25f70 7418only needed if neither @code{HAVE_ATEXIT} nor
feca2ed3
JW
7419@code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP} are defined.
7420
7421@findex INSN_SETS_ARE_DELAYED
7422@item INSN_SETS_ARE_DELAYED (@var{insn})
7423Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if it is safe for the
7424delay slot scheduler to place instructions in the delay slot of @var{insn},
7425even if they appear to use a resource set or clobbered in @var{insn}.
7426@var{insn} is always a @code{jump_insn} or an @code{insn}; GNU CC knows that
7427every @code{call_insn} has this behavior. On machines where some @code{insn}
7428or @code{jump_insn} is really a function call and hence has this behavior,
7429you should define this macro.
7430
7431You need not define this macro if it would always return zero.
7432
7433@findex INSN_REFERENCES_ARE_DELAYED
7434@item INSN_REFERENCES_ARE_DELAYED (@var{insn})
7435Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if it is safe for the
7436delay slot scheduler to place instructions in the delay slot of @var{insn},
7437even if they appear to set or clobber a resource referenced in @var{insn}.
7438@var{insn} is always a @code{jump_insn} or an @code{insn}. On machines where
7439some @code{insn} or @code{jump_insn} is really a function call and its operands
7440are registers whose use is actually in the subroutine it calls, you should
7441define this macro. Doing so allows the delay slot scheduler to move
7442instructions which copy arguments into the argument registers into the delay
7443slot of @var{insn}.
7444
7445You need not define this macro if it would always return zero.
7446
7447@findex MACHINE_DEPENDENT_REORG
7448@item MACHINE_DEPENDENT_REORG (@var{insn})
7449In rare cases, correct code generation requires extra machine
7450dependent processing between the second jump optimization pass and
7451delayed branch scheduling. On those machines, define this macro as a C
7452statement to act on the code starting at @var{insn}.
7453
861bb6c1
JL
7454@findex MULTIPLE_SYMBOL_SPACES
7455@item MULTIPLE_SYMBOL_SPACES
7456Define this macro if in some cases global symbols from one translation
7457unit may not be bound to undefined symbols in another translation unit
7458without user intervention. For instance, under Microsoft Windows
7459symbols must be explicitly imported from shared libraries (DLLs).
7460
70cfa7ad
MM
7461@findex ISSUE_RATE
7462@item ISSUE_RATE
7463A C expression that returns how many instructions can be issued at the
7464same time if the machine is a superscalar machine. This is only used by
7465the @samp{Haifa} scheduler, and not the traditional scheduler.
7466
e4da5f6d
MM
7467@findex MD_SCHED_INIT
7468@item MD_SCHED_INIT (@var{file}, @var{verbose}
7469A C statement which is executed by the @samp{Haifa} scheduler at the
7470beginning of each block of instructions that are to be scheduled.
7471@var{file} is either a null pointer, or a stdio stream to write any
7472debug output to. @var{verbose} is the verbose level provided by
7473@samp{-fsched-verbose-}@var{n}.
7474
7475@findex MD_SCHED_REORDER
7476@item MD_SCHED_REORDER (@var{file}, @var{verbose}, @var{ready}, @var{n_ready})
7477A C statement which is executed by the @samp{Haifa} scheduler after it
7478has scheduled the ready list to allow the machine description to reorder
7479it (for example to combine two small instructions together on
7480@samp{VLIW} machines). @var{file} is either a null pointer, or a stdio
7481stream to write any debug output to. @var{verbose} is the verbose level
7482provided by @samp{-fsched-verbose-}@var{n}. @var{ready} is a pointer to
7483the ready list of instructions that are ready to be scheduled.
7484@var{n_ready} is the number of elements in the ready list. The
7485scheduler reads the ready list in reverse order, starting with
7486@var{ready}[@var{n_ready}-1] and going to @var{ready}[0].
7487
7488@findex MD_SCHED_VARIABLE_ISSUE
7489@item MD_SCHED_VARIABLE_ISSUE (@var{file}, @var{verbose}, @var{insn}, @var{more})
7490A C statement which is executed by the @samp{Haifa} scheduler after it
7491has scheduled an insn from the ready list. @var{file} is either a null
7492pointer, or a stdio stream to write any debug output to. @var{verbose}
7493is the verbose level provided by @samp{-fsched-verbose-}@var{n}.
7494@var{insn} is the instruction that was scheduled. @var{more} is the
7495number of instructions that can be issued in the current cycle. The
7496@samp{MD_SCHED_VARIABLE_ISSUE} macro is responsible for updating the
7497value of @var{more} (typically by @var{more}--).
7498
dbecbbe4
JL
7499@findex MAX_INTEGER_COMPUTATION_MODE
7500@item MAX_INTEGER_COMPUTATION_MODE
7501Define this to the largest integer machine mode which can be used for
7502operations other than load, store and copy operations.
7503
7504You need only define this macro if the target holds values larger than
7505@code{word_mode} in general purpose registers. Most targets should not define
7506this macro.
f89223a9
JL
7507
7508@findex NEED_MATH_LIBRARY
7509@item NEED_MATH_LIBRARY
7510Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if @code{g++} should
7511automatically link in the math library or to zero if @code{g++} should not
7512automatically link in the math library.
7513
7514You need only define this macro if the target does not always need the math
7515library linked into C++ programs.
feca2ed3 7516@end table